Infiniti QX56 2011 Owner's Manual

Add to my manuals
534 Pages

advertisement

Infiniti QX56 2011 Owner's Manual | Manualzz

888744 EN QX56 OM.indd 1

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2011 Infiniti QX Owner’s Manual

2/10/11 11:20 AM

FOREWORD

Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinking about vehicle design. It integrates advanced engineering and superior craftsmanship with a simple, refined aesthetic sensitivity associated with traditional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury and beauty. The car itself is important, but so is the sense of harmony that the vehicle evokes in its driver, and the sense of satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI — from the way it looks and drives to the high level of retailer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s

Manual immediately. It explains all of the features, controls and performance characteristics of your INFINITI; it also provides important instructions and safety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet is included in your Owner’s literature portfolio. The

INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Always carry it with you when you take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer. The Warranty Information Booklet contents provide complete information about all warranties covering this vehicle, the requirements to keep the warranties in effect as well as the INFINITI Roadside Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care and

Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s

Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS

FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!

NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or

drugs.

ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and

never drive too fast for conditions.

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate

child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in the rear seat.

ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.

ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for im-

portant safety information.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off-road use.

As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions”, “Avoiding collision and rollover” and

“Driving safety precautions” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification will not be covered under the INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. INFINITI reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means

“Do not

do this” or “Do not let this happen” .

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those above call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Bluetooth

姞 is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

Gracenote

姞 is a registered trademark of Gracenote,

Inc. The Gracenote logo and logo type, and the

“Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of

Gracenote.

Bluetooth

姞 is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

XM Radio

姞 requires subscription, sold separately. Not available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.

For more information, visit www.xmradio.com.

© 2010 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

INFINITI CARES ...

Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your INFINITI retailer are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your

INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide INFINITI directly with comments or questions, please contact our

(INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-662-6200

For Canadian customers

1-800-361-4792

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (on dash panel)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your INFINITI retailer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to INFINITI with the information on the left at:

For U.S. customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and thank you for buying a quality INFINITI vehicle.

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2

Exterior front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3

Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4

Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

Vk56vd engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-11

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

1. Seat belt for 3rd row center seat belt

(Page 1-24)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags (P. 1-50)

SSI0728

3. Head Restraints (P. 1-8)

— Front-seat Active Head Restraints

(P. 1-12)

4. Seat belts (P. 1-18)

5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags (P. 1-50)

6. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-50)

7. Child restraint anchor points

(for top tether strap child restraint)

(P. 1-32)

8. 3rd row seats (P. 1-6)

— Child restraints (P. 1-30)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-32)

10. Armrest (2nd row seat) (P. 1-16)

11. 2nd row seats (P. 1-4)

— Child restraints (P. 1-30)

12. Seat belt pretensioner (P. 1-62)

13. Front armrest (P. 1-16)

14. Front seats (P. 1-2)

— Occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) (P. 1-55)

15. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-57)

0-2

Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Hood (P. 3-18)

2. Windshield wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P. 2-32)

— Rain-sensing auto wiper system (P. 2-33)

— Wiper blade replacement (P. 8-19)

SSI0729

— Window washer fluid (P. 8-14)

— Windshield wiper deicer* (P. 2-35)

3. Moonroof (P. 2-63)

4. Power windows (P. 2-61)

5. Roof rack (P. 2-60)

6. Front Sensor

— Around View Monitor (P. 4-19)

7. Recovery hook (P. 6-17)

8. Front view camera (P. 4-19)

9. Fog light (P. 2-42)

10. Headlight washers* (P. 2-41)

11. Headlight and turn signal (P. 2-36)

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-26)

— Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)*

(P. 2-40)

12. Tires

— Wheel and tires (P. 8-29, P. 9-9)

— Flat tire (P. 6-2)

— Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) (P. 2-14, P. 5-3)

13. Outside mirrors (P. 3-28)

— Side view camera (P. 4-19)

— Welcome light (P. 2-65)

14. Side turn signal lights

(bulb replacement) (P. 8-26)

15. Doors

— Keys (P. 3-2)

— Door locks (P. 3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P. 3-15)

16. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-6)

*: if so equipped

Illustrated table of contents

0-3

EXTERIOR REAR

1. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-23)

— Fuel recommendation (P. 9-4)

2. Antenna (P. 4-82)

3. Rear combination light (bulb replacement)

(P. 8-26)

0-4

Illustrated table of contents

4. Rear window defroster (P. 2-35)

5. Satellite antenna (P. 4-40)

6. Rear view camera (P. 4-19)

7. High-mounted stop light

(bulb replacement) (P. 8-26)

SSI0737

8. Lift gate (P. 3-19)

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

9. Rear window wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P. 2-34)

— Window washer fluid (P. 8-14)

10. Spare tire (under the vehicle) (P. 6-2)

11. Rear Sensor

— Around View Monitor (P. 4-19)

12. Recovery hook (P. 6-17)

13. Trailer hitch (P. 9-21)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. Cargo light (P. 2-68)

2. Cup holders (3rd row seat) (P. 2-56)

3. Rear ventilators (P. 4-30)

4. Coat hooks (P. 2-59)

5. Rear personal lights (P. 2-66)

SSI0743

6. Tray (P. 2-58)

— USB memory operation* (P. 4-61)

— iPod

姞 player operation* (P. 4-70)

7. Door armrest

— Power window controls (P. 2-61)

— Power door lock switch (P. 3-5)

8. Automatic drive positioner switch (P. 3-30)

9. Sun visors (P. 3-26)

10. Moon roof switch (P. 2-63)

11. Map lights (P. 2-66)

12. Sunglasses holder (P. 2-56)

13. Inside rearview mirror (P. 3-27)

— HomeLink

姞 universal transceiver

(P. 2-68)

14. Cargo area

— Power outlet (P. 2-52)

— Cargo floor box (P. 2-60)

— Luggage hooks (P. 2-59)

— Jacking tools (P. 6-4)

15. Rear console box (P. 2-58)

— Cup holders (2nd row seat)* (P. 2-54)

— Pocket* (P. 2-58)

16. Cup holders (2nd row seat)* (P. 2-54)

17. Dual head restraint DVD system* (P. 4-83)

18. Console box (P. 2-57)

— Power outlet (P. 2-52)

— Auxiliary input jacks* (P. 4-84)

— Rear automatic air conditioning system* (P. 4-37)

19. Power outlet (P. 2-52)/Front cup holders

(P. 2-54)

*: if so equipped

Illustrated table of contents

0-5

COCKPIT

1. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) switch* (P. 2-40)

2. Instrument brightness control switch

(P. 2-41)

0-6

Illustrated table of contents

SSI0748

3. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer

(P. 2-6)

4. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight (P. 2-37)

— Turn signal (P. 2-42)

— Fog light (P. 2-42)

5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(left side)

— Audio control steering switch (P. 4-81)

— Hands-Free Phone System switch

(P. 4-96)

6. Trip computer switch (P. 2-27)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-32)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control system* (P. 5-37)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system*

(P. 5-39)

9. Dynamic driver assistance switch*

— Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system* (P. 5-20)

— Distance Control Assist (DCA) system*

(P. 5-62)

10. Selector lever (P. 5-15)

11. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch*

(P. 5-84)/ SNOW mode switch (P. 2-49)/

TOW MODE switch (P. 2-49)/Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P. 5-98)

12. Headlight aiming control* (P. 2-39)

13. Power lift gate main switch (P. 3-19)

14. Outside rearview mirror remote control switch (P. 3-28)

15. Warning systems switch* (P. 2-47)

— Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*

(P. 5-20)

— Blind Spot Warning (BSW)* (P. 5-29)

— Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*

(P. 5-75)

16. Power lift gate switch (P. 3-19)

17. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch (P. 3-26)

18. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF switch*

(P. 5-80)

*: if so equipped

Illustrated table of contents

0-7

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Side ventilator (P. 4-30)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-5)

3. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-43)

4. Center ventilator (P. 4-30)

0-8

Illustrated table of contents

5. Center multi-function control panel

(P. 4-3)

— Vehicle information and setting buttons (P. 4-7)

SSI0733

6. Center display

— Around View Monitor (P. 4-19)

— Navigation system**

— DVD player operation (P. 4-58)

7. Clock (P. 2-51)

8. Defroster switch (P. 2-35)/Deicer switch*

(P. 2-36)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-50)

10. Fuse box (P. 8-23)

11. Parking brake (P. 5-19)

12. Hood release handle (P. 3-18)

13. Steering wheel

— Horn (P. 2-44)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-50)

— Power steering system (P. 5-94)

14. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10)

15. Climate controlled seat switch*

(P. 2-46)/Heated seat switch* (P. 2-44)

16. Remote tip-up 2nd row seat switch*

(P. 1-8)

17. Heated steering wheel switch (P. 2-43)

18. Power outlet (P. 2-52)

19. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-57)

20. Cup holder (P. 2-54)

21. Automatic climate control system

(P. 4-31)

22. Audio system (P. 4-40)

23. Glove box (P. 2-57)

*: if so equipped

**: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

METERS AND GAUGES

1. Tachometer (P. 2-7)

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P. 2-10)

3. Speedometer (P. 2-6)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P. 2-7)

SIC4450

5. Voltmeter (P. 2-9)

6. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/

Odometer/twin trip odometer (P. 2-21)

7. Engine oil pressure gauge (P. 2-8)

8. Fuel gauge (P. 2-8)

Illustrated table of contents

0-9

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

VK56VD ENGINE

1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)

2. Fuse/fusible link holder (P. 8-21)

3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

0-10

Illustrated table of contents

SDI2585

4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

7. Fuse/fusible link holder (P. 8-21)

8. Battery (P. 8-15)

9. Radiator filler cap (P. 8-7)

10. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)

11. Drive belts (P. 8-17)

12. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

2-11

Automatic Transmission

(AT) check warning light

Automatic Transmission

(AT) oil temperature warning light

Automatic Transmission

(AT) park warning light

Brake warning light

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system warning light (orange)*

2-11

2-11

2-11

2-12

2-12

Warning light

Name Page

Charge warning light 2-13

Distance Control Assist

(DCA) system warning light (orange)*

Engine oil pressure warning light

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light (4WD models)

Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC) system warning light

(orange)*

Intelligent Key system warning light

Lane departure warning light (orange)*

2-13

2-13

2-13

2-14

2-14

2-14

Warning light

Name Page

Low tire pressure warning light

Master warning light

2-14

2-16

Preview Function warning light (orange)*

Seat belt warning light

2-16

2-16

Supplemental air bag warning light

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light

2-16

2-17

Illustrated table of contents

0-11

Indicator light

Name Page Indicator light

Name Page

Adaptive Front lighting

System (AFS) indicator light*

Automatic Transmission

(AT) position indicator light

Check suspension indicator light

Cruise indicator light*

2-17

2-18

2-18

2-18

Low beam indicator light

Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)

Security indicator light

2-19

2-19

2-20

SNOW mode indicator light

TOW mode indicator light

2-20

2-20

Front passenger air bag status light

High beam indicator light

Intelligent Brake Assist

(IBA) off indicator light*

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON indicator light (green)*

2-18

2-18

2-18

2-19

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light

*: if so equipped

2-20

2-20

0-12

Illustrated table of contents

MEMO

Illustrated table of contents

0-13

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

2nd row seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

3rd row seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Headrest (2nd row center seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Armrest (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Pre-crash seat belts with comfort function

(if so equipped for front seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Three-point type seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Larger children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

System (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

Rear-facing Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35

Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

Forward-facing Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

Installing top tether strap (2nd row captain’s seats or 2nd row bench seat) . . . . . . . . . 1-46

Installing top tether strap

(3rd row bench seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50

Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60

Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) . . . . . . 1-62

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

Repair and replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64

SEATS

WARNING

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.

The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

SSS0133

For the most effective protection when the

vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to

make sure it is securely locked.

Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

The seatback should not be reclined any

more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips :

● The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

See “AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for the seat position memory function.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damages.

1-2

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backward :

Moving the switch

䊊 forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

SSS1051

Reclining :

Move the recline switch

䊊 backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position.

SSS1052

Seat lifter:

1. Pull up or push down the adjusting switch to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

2. Tilt up or down the adjusting switch to adjust the front angle of the seat until the desired position is achieved (for driver’s seat).

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-3

SSS1053

Lumbar support :

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the occupants.

Push the front or back end of the switch to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

2ND ROW SEATS

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area

or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

When returning the seatbacks to the upright

position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Captain’s seat

SSS1081

Bench seat

SSS1065

1-4

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Reclining

Pull the reclining lever

䊊 and position the seatback at the desired angle. Release the reclining lever after positioning the seat at the desired angle.

To return the seatback, pull the lever.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS

ON SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this section.) The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked.

WARNING

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.

The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the

vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.

After adjustment, check to be sure the seat is

securely locked.

SSS1066

Entry to 3rd row seat

CAUTION

Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped up.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-5

Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat to

pinch, hit any part of your body or other people when operating the 2nd row seat.

Make sure the seat path is clear of all objects before moving the seat.

The 2nd row seat can be tipped forward for easy entry to or exit from the 3rd row seat.

For manual type :

To enter the 3rd row seat, pull the lever

䊊 located on the 2nd row seat and fold the seatback forward

䊊 or at an angle over the seat base. Then lift up the seat base and tip the 2nd row seat forward

. This will release the back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

To exit the 3rd row seat, pull the lever

䊊 or

䊊 and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward.

SSS1094

For remote release type (if so equipped) :

Push and hold the switch located on the instrument panel. The seatback will fold down and tip forward.

The lower corner of the seat base will lift and the 2nd row seat will tip forward.

SSS1116

3RD ROW SEATS

The 3rd row power folding seat controls are located behind the 2nd row seat (both the driver’s and passenger’s side) on the 3rd row cup holder console

. There are also controls located on the rear quarter trim panel behind the 3rd row seats (passenger’s side)

.

Before operating the 3rd row seats:

● Make sure the 2nd row seatback is not reclined.

● Lower the 3rd row headrest to the full down position.

1-6

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● Disconnect and secure the center seat belt and tongues into the retractor base. See

“Stowing 3rd row center seat belt” later in this section.

– Always reconnect the center seat belt when the seat is returned to the upright position

● Make sure that there are no objects on the seatback cushion.

SSS1095

Power reclining

Push and hold the rear side of the switch

䊊 beside the 3rd row cup holders until the desired seatback angle (up to 20 degrees) is obtained.

To move the seatback forward again, push and hold the front side of the switch

䊊 until the desired angle is obtained.

WARNING

After adjustment, check to be sure the seat is

securely locked.

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.

The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the

vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-7

SSS1118

Power folding

Push and hold the front side of the switch

䊊 located on the passenger side of the cargo room.

The corresponding seatback (R: right side, L: left side) will be folded down automatically.

Push and hold the rear side of the switch

.

The seatback will be returned automatically.

The seatback will rise up while holding the switch.

NOTE:

Operating the power folding seats can discharge the vehicle battery if the vehicle is not running.

CAUTION

When operating the rear power seatback return, make sure that the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area

or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

When returning the seatbacks to the upright

position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

1-8

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the head restraints properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been removed. If the head restraint was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints. The head restraints are adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.

SSS1100

Components

1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

SSS0992

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-9

SSS0997

Adjustment

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of your ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

SSS0993 SSS0994

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

1-10

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

Models with a head restraint display (if so equipped) are designed so that the head restraint cannot be removed. The head restraint display may be damaged if the head restraint is forcibly pulled out.

SSS0995

Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the adjustable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position.

SSS0996

Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint is facing the correct direction.

The stalk with the adjustment notches

䊊 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob

.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-11

SSS0508

Front-seat Active Head Restraint

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described earlier in this section.

HEADREST

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrests properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the adjustable headrest stalks or remove the adjustable headrests. Do not use the seat if the adjustable headrests have been removed. If the headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the adjustable headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

1-12

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with adjustable headrests.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable or removable headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.

SSS1101 SSS1128

Components

1. Adjustable headrest (if so equipped)

2. Adjustment notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-13

SSS1123

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the lock position.

SSS1124

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down.

SSS1125

Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position (adjustable headrest only).

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the headrest

(adjustable headrest only) before an occupant uses the seating position.

1-14

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1126

Install

1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the adjustment notch must be installed in the hole with the lock knob

.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating position (adjustable headrest only).

SSS0969

HEADREST (2nd row center seat)

Removal and attachment

To remove the headrest, push and hold the lock knob

䊊 and pull the headrest up.

If the headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Reinstall the headrest when the headrest does not need to be removed.

To attach the headrest, push and hold the lock knob

䊊 and insert the headrest stalks into the holes.

Front seats

SSS1111

SSS1070

2nd row seat

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-15

ARMREST (if so equipped)

Front seats

The console box lid can be used as an armrest.

Slide the box lid forward or backward to the desired position (if so equipped).

2nd row seat

Pull and draw the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area

or on the rear seats when they are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Do not fold down the rear seats when occu-

pants are in the rear seat area or any cargo is on the rear seats.

Head restraints and headrests (except for

2nd row center seat) should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason.

If the head restraints are removed for any

reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.

When returning the seatbacks to the upright

position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

1-16

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1119

WARNING

When folding or returning the seat(s) to the

upright position, to avoid injury to yourself and others:

– Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get caught or pinched in the seat.

When folding the bench seat seatback down

for maximum storage, make sure the seat base is in the latched position by rocking the seat base. If the seat base is not properly secured, cargo stored on top of a folded seatback may become a projectile causing personal injury or vehicle damage.

CAUTION

When folding the 2nd row seat for maximum cargo hauling, be sure that cargo does not contact the center console of the captain’s seat (if so equipped) to avoid possible damage to the console.

Stowing 2nd and 3rd row seats

To stow 2nd and 3rd row seats for maximum cargo capacity:

Manual Operation:

1. Pull lever A or B located on the 2nd row seat. The seatback folds down and the seat base will tip forward. See “Entry to

3rd row seat” earlier in this section.

Power Operation:

1. Push and hold the corresponding switch located on the instrument panel below the audio system. The seatback will fold down and tip forward. See “Entry to 3rd row seat” earlier in this section.

SSS1120

2. Push the folded seat down until it locks in position.

SSS1121

3. Fold the 3rd row seat flat using the switches located in the cargo area. See

“Power folding” earlier in this section.

4. Return 3rd row seats to seating positions by raising the 3rd row seatbacks to an upright position using the switches. Make sure the seatback is locked in position.

See “Power folding” earlier in this section.

5. Return the 2nd row seat to a seating position by raising the 2nd row seatbacks to an upright position. Make sure the seatback is locked in position.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-17

SEAT BELTS

CAUTION

When folding the 2nd row seat for maximum cargo hauling, be sure that cargo does not contact the center console of the captain’s seat (if so equipped) to avoid possible damage to the console.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

1-18

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0136A

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in this ve-

hicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.

The seat belt should be properly adjusted to

a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Always route the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST.

A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fas-

tened to the proper buckle.

Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted.

Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.

SSS0134A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-19

Do not allow more than one person to use the

same seat belt.

Never carry more people in the vehicle than

there are seat belts.

If the seat belt warning light glows continu-

ously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

No changes should be made to the seat belt

system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated,

it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See an INFINITI retailer.

Removal and installation of the pretensioner

seat belt system components should be done by an INFINITI retailer.

All seat belt assemblies, including retractors

and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision by an INFINITI retailer. INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

All child restraints and attaching hardware

should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

1-20

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0016

SSS0014

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist, and place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS WITH

COMFORT FUNCTION (if so equipped for front seats)

The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat belt with a motor to help restrain front seat occupants. This helps reduce the risk of injury in a collision.

The motor retracts the seat belt under the following emergency conditions:

● During emergency braking

● During sudden steering maneuvers

● Activation of the Intelligent Brake Assist

(IBA) system. (See “INTELLIGENT BRAKE AS-

SIST (IBA) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

● In the event of a high severity rollover collision.

The pre-crash seat belt will not be active when:

● the seat belt is not fastened

● the vehicle speed is under 10 MPH (15 km/h) during emergency braking

● the vehicle speed is under 19 MPH (30 km/h) during sudden steering maneuvers or in the event of a high severity rollover collision.

The pre-crash seat belt will not be active when the brake pedal is not depressed except when sudden steering maneuvers occur or the Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system activates.

The motor also retracts the seat belt when the seat belt is fastened or unfastened. When the seat belt is fastened, the motor tightens the seat belt for a snug fit. When the seat belt is unfastened, the motor retracts the seat belt. If the seat belt is not fully retracted, the motor retracts the seat belt when the door is opened.

Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit upright and well back.

If the motor cannot retract the seat belt when the seat belt is fastened or unfastened, it may indicate the pre-crash seat belt system has a malfunction. Have your INFINITI retailer check and repair the system.

When the seat belt is retracted repeatedly in a short period of time, the motor may not be able to retract the seat belt. After 8 minutes, the motor reactivates and retracts the seat belt. If the seat belt still cannot be retracted by the motor, the pre-crash seat belt system has a malfunction. Have your INFINITI retailer check and repair the system.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-21

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in this ve-

hicle should use a seat belt at all times.

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.

The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the

vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

SSS0292

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in this section.)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock during a

sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its

fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

1-22

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion

low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

The three-point type seat belts have two modes of operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0326

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:

● When the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-23

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any question about seat belt operation, see an INFINITI retailer.

SSS1109

Center of 2nd row seat (if so equipped)

Selecting correct set of seat belts :

The center seat belt buckle is identified by the

CENTER mark

. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.

SSS0391

3rd row center seat belt

The 3rd row center seat belt has a connector tongue

䊊 and a seat belt tongue

. Both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely latched for proper seat belt operation.

1-24

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0241

WARNING

Always fasten the connector tongue and the

seat belt in the order shown.

Always make sure both the connector

tongue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt or installing a child restraint. Do not use the seat belt or child restraint with only the seat belt tongue attached. This could result in serious personal injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop.

Stowing 3rd row center seat belt :

When folding down the 3rd row seat, the 3rd center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position.

1. Hold the connector tongue

䊊 so that the seat belt does not retract suddenly when the tongue is released from the connector buckle. Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool such as key

䊊 into the connector buckle.

2. Store the seat belt tongue into the tongue holder

䊊 first

.

3. Store the connector tongue into the retractor base

.

WARNING

Do not unfasten the 3rd center seat belt connector except when folding down the 3rd seat.

SSS1077

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-25

Attaching 3rd row center seat belt :

Always be sure the 3rd center seat belt connector tongue and connector buckle are attached.

Disconnect only when folding down the 3rd row seat.

To connect the buckle:

1. Pull out the connector tongue from the retractor base

.

2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the tongue holder

䊊 䊊

.

3. Pull the seat belt and fasten the connector buckle until it clicks

.

The center seat belt connector tongue and buckle are identified by the and mark.

The center seat belt connector tongue can be attached only into the 3rd center seat belt connector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat belts” earlier in this section.

WARNING

When attaching the 3rd center seat belt con-

nector, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position and the 3rd center seat belt connector is completely secured.

If the 3rd center seat belt connector and the

seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury may result in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS1078

1-26

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1097

Storing 3rd row seat belt buckles

Before folding down the seat, put the buckles in the storage of the seat cushion to avoid dropping it under the seat cushion.

WARNING

After adjustment, release the adjustment

button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

SSS0896

Shoulder belt height adjustment (for front seats and 2nd row seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. (See

“PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE” earlier in this section.)

To adjust, push the button

, and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See an INFINITI retailer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-27

CHILD SAFETY

WARNING

Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made by

the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with the INFINITI seat belts.

Adults and children who can use the stan-

dard seat belt should not use an extender.

Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

Never use seat belt extenders to install child

restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

Periodically check to see that the seat belt

and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:

● Rear-facing child restraint

● Forward-facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least

1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

1-28

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection.

The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and

Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section for more information.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) for the front passenger. See

“SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” later in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. INFINITI recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rearfacing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint.

Forward-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations.

INFINITI recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in

(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

INFINITI recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoulder belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-29

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

SSS0099

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

– The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never be held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.

– INFINITI recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, see “FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS” later in this section.

SSS0100

1-30

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.

When the child restraint is not in use, keep it

secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors.

For details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren System (LATCH)” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes.

When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-31

SSS1113

LATCH system lower anchor locations captain’s seats

SSS1114

LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat

LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS FOR

CHILDREN SYSTEM (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with the LATCH (Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only:

● 2nd row captain’s seats (if so equipped)

● 2nd row bench seat outboard positions only

(if so equipped)

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

− Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.

− Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

− Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

1-32

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1122

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH anchors.

SSS1117

SSS0643

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-33

LATCH rigid attachment

SSS0644

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts.

See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT” later in this section for installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

2nd row captain’s seat

SSS1088

SSS1073

3rd row bench seat

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to an anchor point.

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint

with a top tether strap can only be used in the center position. Do not place in an outboard seating position and attempt to angle the tether strap to the center position.

SSS1072

2nd row bench seat

1-34

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Child restraint anchor points are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether

strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage the top tether strap during a collision. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged.

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following locations:

● 2nd row bench seat (if so equipped) on the floor behind the outboard seating positions as shown.

● 2nd row captain’s seats (if so equipped) on the floor behind the seats as shown.

● 3rd row bench seat on the floor of the cargo area behind the center seat position as shown.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult an INFINITI retailer for details.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

SSS1102

Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-35

SSS1103

Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing — step 3

SSS0639

Rear-facing — step 4

SSS0650

3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path.

The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the

LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-36

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.

When installing a child restraint system in

the 3rd center position, both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured. See “Attaching 3rd row center seat belt” earlier in this section.

SSS0100

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the

ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-37

SSS0100 SSS0654 SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 1 Rear-facing — step 2 Rear-facing — step 3

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“CHILD SAFETY” earlier in this section and

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

1.

Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

1-38

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0656 SSS0657 SSS0658

Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5 Rear-facing — step 6

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-39

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0645

Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2

SSS1104

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 3

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place.

Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is re-

moved. See “Adjustable head restraint or headrest” in this section for head restraint or headrest adjustment information.

1-40

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

SSS0647 SSS0638

Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 6

4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path.

The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the

LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-41

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the

ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.

When installing a child restraint system in

the 3rd center position, both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured. See “Attaching 3rd row center seat belt” earlier in this section.

SSS0640

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1.

If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forwardfacing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.

1-42

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place.

Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is re-

moved. See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section or “HEADREST” earlier in this section for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing — step 3

SSS0360B

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See “IN-

STALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (2nd row captain’s seats or 2nd row bench seat)” later in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

SSS0651

Forward-facing — step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor

(ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-43

SSS0652 SSS0653 SSS0641

Forward-facing — step 5 Forward-facing — step 6 Forward-facing — step 8

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-44

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

SSS1099

SSS1088

Forward-facing — step 10

2nd row captain’s seat

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

Move the child restraint to another seat-

ing position. Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

SSS1072

2nd row bench seat

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-45

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP

(2nd row captain’s seats or 2nd row bench seat)

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (2nd row captain’s or bench outboard seating positions only) or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head restraint or headrest to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback.

If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed. See

“HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section and “HEADREST” earlier in this section for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the back of each seatback behind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. Make sure the head restraint or headrest does not contact the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap on the rear seat, consult your

INFINITI retailer for details.

3rd row bench seat

SSS1073

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (3rd row bench seat)

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used in the center position. Do not place in an outboard seating position and attempt to angle the tether strap to the center position.

1-46

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The center position of the 3rd row bench seat is the seating position that can use a top tether strap.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Position the top tether strap over the top of the center seating position seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the floor behind the child restraint.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint installation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your INFINITI retailer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:

− Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.

− Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child’s arm.

− A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS0453

● Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a low back booster seat

䊊 is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a high back booster seat

䊊 should be used.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-47

● If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

LRS0464

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections earlier in this section before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1-48

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0640

1.

If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a forward-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0454

Front passenger position

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint or headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place.

Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the booster seat is re-

moved. See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section or “HEADREST” earlier in this section for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this section.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-49

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

SSS1099

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, push the ignition switch to the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat used.

See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the following systems.

● Driver and passenger supplemental frontimpact air bag (INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system: The

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvis area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear (2nd and 3rd) outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short period of time.

These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger seat belts and are

not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.

1-50

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0131

WARNING

The supplemental front air bags ordinarily

will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The front passenger air bag will not inflate if

the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See

“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

The seat belts and the front air bags are most

effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far-away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.

SSS0132

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-51

The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger seat is equipped with

occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) that turn the front passenger air bag

OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

Keep hands on the outside of the steering

wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk of injury if the front air bag inflates.

SSS0007

1-52

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

WARNING

Never let children ride unrestrained or ex-

tend their hands or face out of the window.

Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Children may be severely injured or killed

when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain and rollover air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child.

See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section for details.

SSS0100

SSS0832

SSS0833

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-53

SSS0140 SSS0159

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:

The side-impact supplemental air bags ordi-

narily will not inflate in the event of a front impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The curtain side-impact and rollover supple-

mental air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain

and rollover air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bags on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold

onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bags inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained.

Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Do not use seat covers on the front seat-

backs. They may interfere with side air bags inflation.

SSS0162

1-54

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules (INFINITI Advanced Air Bags)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators

7. Satellite sensors

8. Buckle pretensioners

9. Diagnosis sensor unit

10. Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)

11. Occupant classification system control unit

INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM

(front seats)

SSS1098

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s advanced air bag system, please observe the following items.

Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to

push or pull on the seatback pocket.

Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9 lbs.

(4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint or in the seatback pocket.

Do not store cargo behind the seat that can

press into the seatback.

4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags

6. Seat belt pre-tensioners

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-55

Do not position the front passenger seat so it

contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.

If a forward facing child restraint is installed

in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. See

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section for information about installing and using child restraints.

Confirm the operating condition with the

front passenger air bag status light.

If you notice that the front passenger air bag

status light is not operating in accordance with the above description, please take your vehicle to your INFINITI retailer to check the passenger seat advanced air bag system.

Until you have confirmed with your retailer

that your passenger seat advanced air bag is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S.

regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.

However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag operation.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors information from the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant classification sensors (weight sensors). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensors are also monitored. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the information provided by the occupant classification sensors. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). (See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section for further details.) One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.

1-56

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If you have any questions about your air bag system, contact INFINITI or an INFINITI retailer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

INFINITI. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the head and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

SSS1099

Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions.

Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-57

Status light :

The front passenger air bag status light is located on the instrument panel.

The light operates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger seat: The light is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The light illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions outlined in this section: The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag :

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.

such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) are on the seat cushion frame under the front passenger seat and are designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensors can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants,

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.

INFINITI also recommends that appropriate

1-58

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints. Failing to properly secure child restrains and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section for proper use and installation.)

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object being detected by the occupant classification sensors. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illuminated

(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the passenger air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly.

Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the passenger air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your INFINITI retailer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool.

However, until you have confirmed with your retailer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. However, if the seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status light will remain off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light , located in the meter and gauges area will blink. Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions

WARNING

Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.

Do not place objects with sharp edges on the

seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such objects can damage the seat or occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors). This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensors. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Immediately after inflation, several front air

bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your

vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-59

Tampering with the air bag system may re-

sult in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.

Modifying or tampering with the front pas-

senger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that is not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensors.

No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

Work on and around the front air bag system

should be done by an INFINITI retailer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an INFINITI retailer. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected.

Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.

A cracked windshield should be replaced im-

mediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

* 1.

The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS1092

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND

ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-

IMPACT AND ROLLOVER

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain and rollover air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants.

However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side

1-60

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe off roading) may cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag operation.

When side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvis of the front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear (2nd and 3rd) outboard seating positions.

They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain and rollover air bag will remain inflated for a while.

The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

Do not place any objects near the seatback

of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if side air bag inflates.

Right after inflation, several side air bags

and curtain and rollover air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of side air bag and curtain and rollover air bags. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your

vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-61

Tampering with the air bag system may re-

sult in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatback or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bags.

Work around and on the side air bag and

curtain and rollover air bag systems should be done by an INFINITI retailer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an INFINITI retailer. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side-impact air bag system.

* 1.

The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(front seats)

WARNING

The pretensioners cannot be reused after ac-

tivation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal,

side impact and rollover collision but a pretensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by an INFINITI retailer.

No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners. Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

Work around and on the pretensioner sys-

tem should be done by an INFINITI retailer.

Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an INFINITI retailer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.

If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or

scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI retailer. Correct pretensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate

INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The pre-tensioner system activates when any of the air bags deploy. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor and buckle anchor. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, and it does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

1-62

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON position. In this case, the pretensioner system may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest INFINITI retailer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS1016 SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SRS air bag

The warning labels

䊊 surface of the sun visors.

are located on the

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental frontimpact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag, and seat belt pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits include the Air bag Control Unit

(ACU), satellite sensors, crash zone sensor, occupant classification system front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain and rollover air bag modules, pretensioners, front passenger air bag status light and all related wiring.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-63

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.

This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on approximately 7 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bags, and curtain and rollover air bags or pretensioner systems may not operate properly.

They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident.

To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a retailer as soon as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

PROCEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these systems should be done only by an INFINITI retailer.

When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain and rollover air bags, pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance.

The ignition switch should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

1-64

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Once a front air bag, side air bag or curtain

and rollover air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner should be replaced by an INFINITI retailer. The air bag module and pretensioner system cannot be repaired.

The front air bag, side air bag, curtain and

rollover air bag and the pretensioner should be inspected by an INFINITI retailer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle.

If you need to dispose of a supplemental air

bag or pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI retailer. Correct supplemental air bag and pretensioner system disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

MEMO

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-65

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Fuel gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Voltmeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Meter/ring illumination and needle sweep. . . . . . . . 2-9

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders. . . . . 2-10

Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Dot matrix liquid crystal display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Indicators for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Indicators for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Windshield wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Washer operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Rain-sensing auto wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Rear window and outside mirror defroster/ windshield deicer (if so equipped) switch . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Rear window and outside mirror defroster . . . . . . . 2-35

Windshield deicer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Headlight washer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Heated seats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Climate controlled seats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Warning systems switch (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . 2-47

Warning systems switch (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . 2-48

SNOW mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Tow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF switch

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Adjusting the time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Sunglasses holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Cargo floor box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

Battery saver system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Rear personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Interior light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67

Vanity mirror lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

HomeLink

姞 Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Programming HomeLink

姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

Programming HomeLink

姞 for Canadian customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

Operating the HomeLink

姞 Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

Programming trouble-diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

Reprogramming a single HomeLink

姞 button . . . . . 2-71

If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

COCKPIT

1. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) switch*

2. Instrument brightness control switch

3. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer

SSI0748

4. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight

— Turn signal

— Fog light

5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(left side)

— Audio control steering switch

— Hands-Free Phone System switch

6. Trip computer switch

7. Wiper and washer switch

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control system*

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system*

9. Dynamic driver assistance switch*

— Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system*

— Distance Control Assist (DCA) system*

10. Selector lever

11. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch*/

SNOW mode switch/TOW MODE switch/

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

12. Headlight aiming control*

13. Power lift gate main switch

14. Outside rearview mirror remote control switch

15. Warning systems switch*

— Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*

— Blind Spot Warning (BSW)*

— Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*

2-2

Instruments and controls

16. Power lift gate switch

17. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch

18. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF switch*

*: if so equipped

Instruments and controls

2-3

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Side ventilator

2. Meters and gauges

3. Hazard indicator flasher switch

4. Center ventilator

2-4

Instruments and controls

SSI0733

5. Center multi-function control panel

— Vehicle information and setting buttons

6. Center display

— Around View Monitor

— Navigation system**

— DVD player operation

7. Clock

8. Defroster switch/Deicer switch*

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag

10. Fuse box

11. Parking brake

12. Hood release handle

13. Steering wheel

— Horn

— Driver supplemental air bag

— Power steering system

14. Push-button ignition switch

15. Climate controlled seat switch*/Heated seat switch*

16. Remote tip-up 2nd row seat switch*

17. Heated steering wheel switch

18. Power outlet

19. Front passenger air bag status light

20. Cup holder

21. Automatic air conditioning system

22. Audio system

23. Glove box

*: if so equipped

**: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

METERS AND GAUGES

*: The needle indicators may move slightly after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

This is not a malfunction.

1. Tachometer*

2. Warning/Indicator lights

3. Speedometer*

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge*

5. Voltmeter*

6. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/

Odometer/twin trip odometer

7. Engine oil pressure gauge*

8. Fuel gauge*

SIC4450

Instruments and controls

2-5

Speedometer

SIC4369

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

Odometer/twin trip odometer

SIC4370

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer

䊊 and twin trip odometer

䊊 are displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

Changing the display :

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

䊊 at the bottom left of the combination meter panel changes the display as follows:

TRIP A

→ TRIP B → TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer :

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

䊊 for more than

1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to empty information is also available. (See “DOT MATRIX

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in this section.)

2-6

Instruments and controls

SIC4371

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM).

Do not rev the engine into the red zone

.

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed.

Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

SIC4372

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone

䊊 shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature.

If gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “IF

YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency” section for immediate action required.

Instruments and controls

2-7

SIC4374

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers

“0” (Empty).

The low fuel warning appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches “0”.

2-8

Instruments and controls

There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches “0”.

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off.

If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an

INFINITI retailer.

For additional information, see “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this section.

SIC4375

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication system oil pressure while the engine is running.

When the engine speed is high, the engine oil pressure is also high. When it is low, the gauge indicates the low (L) oil pressure.

The engine oil pressure is normal when the gauge needle points within the zone

䊊 shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

This gauge is not designed to indicate low

engine oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See “ENGINE OIL” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

If the gauge needle does not move with the

proper amount of engine oil, have the vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer. Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine.

SIC4376

VOLTMETER

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the volt meter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volt drop below the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal range (10.5 to 15.5 volt) while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

METER/RING ILLUMINATION AND

NEEDLE SWEEP

The ring illumination surrounding meters and gauges illuminates when the driver’s door is closed after getting into the vehicle with the

Intelligent Key carried in.

When the engine is started, the indicator needles will sweep in the speedometer and tachometer and the ring illumination will be brightened gradually. This function can be turned off. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

Instruments and controls

2-9

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

Automatic transmission check warning light

Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature warning light

Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning light

Brake warning light

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system warning light (orange)*

Charge warning light

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system warning light (orange)*

Engine oil pressure warning light

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light

(4WD models)

2-10

Instruments and controls

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system warning light (orange)*

Intelligent Key warning light

Lane departure warning light

(orange)*

Low tire pressure warning light

Master warning light

Preview Function warning light (orange)*

Seat belt warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

CRUISE indicator light*

Front passenger air bag status light

High beam indicator light

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator light*

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON indicator light (green)*

Low beam indicator light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Security indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light

Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) indicator light*

Automatic transmission position indicator light

Check suspension indicator light

SNOW mode indicator light

TOW mode indicator light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light

*: if so equipped

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and push the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on (if so equipped):

,

,

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go off (if so equipped):

, or , , , ,

, , , , ,

If any light does not come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display between the speedometer and tachometer. (See

“DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in this section.)

WARNING LIGHTS or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Automatic transmission check warning light

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any other time, it may indicate the transmission is not functioning properly. Have your INFINITI retailer check and repair the transmission.

Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning light

This light indicates that the Automatic Transmission (AT) parking function is not engaged. If the transfer control is not secured in any driving position while the AT selector lever is in the “P”

(Park) position, the transmission will disengage and the wheels will not lock.

If the AT park warning light illuminates with the selector lever in the P (Park) position, shift the

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch to the

AUTO, 4H or 4L position again with the selector

lever in the N (Neutral) position. (See “INFINITI

ALL-MODE 4WD

姞” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature warning light

This light illuminates when the Automatic

Transmission (AT) oil temperature is too high. If the light illuminates while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as soon as safely possible until the light turns off.

Instruments and controls

2-11

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the AT oil temperature warning light is on may damage the AT.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator :

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light :

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is necessary, add fluid and have the system checked by your INFINITI retailer. (See

“BRAKE FLUID” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Low hydraulic pressure warning indicator :

If the brake warning light illuminates when the engine is running, or while driving with the parking brake is released, check the brake fluid level. If the brake fluid level is sufficient, it may indicate low hydraulic pressure in the brake booster. Have the brake system checked by an

INFINITI retailer promptly.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator :

When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked, and if necessary repaired, by an INFINITI retailer promptly. (See

“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” earlier in this section.)

WARNING

Your brake system may not be working prop-

erly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.

Pressing the brake pedal with the engine

stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

If the brake fluid level is below the minimum

or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at an INFINITI retailer.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system warning light

(orange; if so equipped)

If the light comes on in orange and remains on, it may indicate that the BSW system is not functioning properly. Although the vehicle is still driveable, have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer. See “BLIND SPOT WARNING

(BSW) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

2-12

Instruments and controls

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see an INFINITI retailer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system warning light

(orange; if so equipped)

This light comes on if there is a malfunction in the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system.

If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and turn on the DCA system again.

If it is not possible to turn on the system or the warning light stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

See “DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYS-

TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call an INFINITI retailer or other authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dip-

stick to check the oil level. (See “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light (4WD models)

The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is pushed to ON. It turns off soon after the engine is started.

If the 4WD system malfunctions, or the diameter of the front and the rear wheels are different, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. (See “INFINITI ALL-MODE 4WD

姞” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

CAUTION

If the warning light comes on while driving

there may be a malfunction in the 4WD system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

If the 4WD warning light turns on when driv-

ing on dry or hard surfaced roads:

– in the 4H(I) position, shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO

– in the 4L(O) position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever to the “N” (Neutral) position and shift the

4WD shift switch to AUTO

Instruments and controls

2-13

If the warning light is still on after the above

operations, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC) system warning light

(orange; if so equipped)

This light comes on if there is a malfunction in the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system.

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

Intelligent Key warning light

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off.

This light warns of a malfunction with the electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent

Key system.

If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to free the steering lock or to start the engine. If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in these cases, contact an INFINITI retailer for repair as soon as possible.

Lane departure warning light

(orange; if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light will come on in orange, turn green, and then turn off. This indicates that the

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) systems are operational.

While the LDW and/or LDP system is on, the light will blink in orange and a warning chime will sound if the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane with detectable lane markers.

If the light comes on in orange and remains on, it may indicate that the LDW and LDP systems are not functioning properly. Although the vehicle is still driveable, have the systems checked by an INFINITI retailer.

See “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/ PRE-

VENTION (LDP) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning :

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if so equipped) also appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal display. If you select the tire pressure information in the display, the LOW PRESSURE information will be displayed. The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed.

2-14

Instruments and controls

When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if so equipped) is active as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, see “DOT MATRIX

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in this section,

“TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section and

“TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction :

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is pushed ON. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if so equipped) does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a

TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, see “TIRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

If the light does not illuminate with the igni-

tion switch pushed ON, have the vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

If the light illuminates or LOW PRESSURE

information is displayed on the monitor screen while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Instruments and controls

2-15

CAUTION

The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular

tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.

If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less

than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.

Be sure to install the specified size of tires to

the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display:

● No key warning

● Low fuel warning

● Low washer fluid warning

● Parking brake release warning

● Door/lift gate open warning

● Loose fuel cap warning (if so equipped)

● Check tire pressure warning (if so equipped)

See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in this section.

2-16

Instruments and controls

Preview Function warning light (orange; if so equipped)

The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the Brake Assist (with Preview Function) system.

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, then resume driving.

If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, and will remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger’s seat is occupied.

For approximately 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the front-impact air bag and side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems and/or pretensioner seat belts are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest INFINITI retailer.

● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly.

For additional information, see “SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a retailer as soon as possible.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light

The light will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating, thus alerting the driver that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be slippery.

When the vehicle dynamic control warning light illuminates when the vehicle dynamic control system is turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode is operating, for example the vehicle dynamic control or hill start assist system may not be functioning properly.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the vehicle dynamic control system function will be canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC

CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Adaptive Front lighting

System (AFS) indicator light

(if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) indicator light will illuminate. The light will turn off in about 1 second if the AFS is operational.

This light also comes on when the AFS is turned off by pushing the AFS switch.

If the AFS indicator light blinks, it may indicate the AFS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

See “Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)” later in this section.

Instruments and controls

2-17

Automatic transmission position indicator light

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the indicator shows the automatic selector position.

In the manual shift mode, when the transmission does not shift to the selected gear due to a transmission protection mode, the AT position indicator light will blink and a chime will sound.

See “AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section for further details.

Check suspension indicator light

When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, the light comes on for 2 seconds.

Cruise indicator light (if so equipped)

Cruise main switch indicator :

This light illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light turns off when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light illuminates, the cruise control system is operational. (See

“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

2-18

Instruments and controls

Cruise malfunction :

If the cruise indicator light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer. (See

“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Front passenger air bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light ( located on the instrument panel will be lit and

) the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM

(front seats)” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator light (if so equipped)

The light illuminates when the Intelligent Brake

Assist (IBA) off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates that the Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system is not operating.

When the IBA off indicator light illuminates while the system is turned on (without the warning chime sound), this light indicates that the system control is temporarily unavailable.

When the IBA off indicator light illuminates with the warning chime sound while the IBA system is turned on, this light indicates that the system may not be functioning properly. Park the vehicle in a safe place. Check to see if the laser sensor is clean. Turn the engine off, then restart the engine.

If the IBA off indicator light illuminates after following the procedures above, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer. (See “INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA)

SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Lane Departure Prevention

(LDP) ON indicator light

(green; if so equipped)

The light comes on in green when the Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system is turned on.

The light turns off when the system is turned off.

NOTE:

This light is common with the lane departure warning light (orange). (See “Lane departure warning light” earlier in this section.)

For more details, see “LANE DEPARTURE WARN-

ING (LDW)/PREVENTION (LDP) SYSTEM” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.

Low beam indicator light

The light illuminates when the front park, side marker, tail and license plate lights are on.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least

3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. (See “READINESS

FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.)

Operation :

The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways:

● Malfunction indicator light on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning (if so equipped) appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an

INFINITI retailer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the retailer.

● Malfunction indicator light blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI retailer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the retailer.

Instruments and controls

2-19

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position. For additional information, see “SECURITY SYSTEMS” later in this section.

SNOW mode indicator light

When selecting SNOW mode while the engine is running, this light will illuminate. (See “SNOW

MODE” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

TOW mode indicator light

This light will illuminate when the TOW MODE is selected while the engine is running. (See “TOW

MODE” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates that the vehicle dynamic control system is not operating. When the 4L position is selected with the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch, the VDC system is disabled and the VDC off indicator light illuminates. For additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door is opened while the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC position. Make sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take the

Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the light switch in the or position and the ignition switch in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

The chime will also sound for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position with the fog lights on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

Parking brake reminder chime

The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake.

2-20

Instruments and controls

DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

SIC4379

The dot matrix liquid crystal display appears in the vehicle information display

䊊 located between the speedometer and odometer, and shows the indicators for the driving systems,

Intelligent Key operation and various warnings and information.

For detailed information about each system, see the following sections:

● Automatic Transmission (AT)

– “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AU-

DIBLE REMINDERS” earlier in this section.

– “DRIVING THE VEHICLE” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

● Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) system

– “INFINITI ALL-MODE 4WD

姞” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

● Cruise control system

– “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

● Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

– “INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

● Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

– “DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYS-

TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

● Intelligent Key system

– “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

– “PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.

Instruments and controls

2-21

2-22

Instruments and controls

SIC4629

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicator

This indicator appears when the selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed.

2. Steering lock release malfunction indicator

This indicator appears when the steering wheel cannot be released from the LOCK position.

If this indicator appears, push the push-button ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.

3. NO KEY warning

This warning appears in either of the following conditions.

No key inside the vehicle :

The warning appears when the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key :

The warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed from the LOCK position and the

Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key. Use the registered Intelligent

Key.

See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Predriving checks and adjustments” section for more details.

4. SHIFT “P” warning

This warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever in any position except the P (Park) position.

If this warning appears, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position or push the ignition switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound. (See

“INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Predriving checks and adjustments” section.)

5. “PUSH” warning

This warning appears when the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P” warning appears.

To push the ignition switch to the OFF position, perform the following procedure:

SHIFT “P” warning

→ (Move the selector lever to “P”)

PUSH warning → (Push the ignition switch

→ ignition switch position is turned to

ON)

PUSH warning → (Push the ignition switch

→ ignition switch position is turned to

OFF)

6. Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

7. Engine start operation for

Intelligent Key system indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power and when the

Intelligent Key System and vehicle are not communicating normally.

If this indicator appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BAT-

TERY DISCHARGE” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Instruments and controls

2-23

8. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is applied.

9. Low fuel warning

This warning appears when the fuel level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the 0 (Empty) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches the 0 (Empty) position.

10. Low washer fluid warning

This warning appears when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See “WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

11. Door/lift gate open warning

(ignition switch is in the ON position)

This warning appears if any of the doors and/or the lift gate are open or not closed securely. The vehicle icon indicates which door or the lift gate is open on the display.

12. Loose fuel cap warning (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. (See “FUEL-FILLER CAP” in the

“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.)

13. Check tire pressure warning (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. (See “Low tire pressure warning light” earlier in this section and “TIRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

14. “TIMER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set “TIMER” indicator activates. You can set the time for up to 6 hours. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

15. Low outside temperature warning

This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The warning can be set not to be displayed. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

16. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift indicator (4WD models)

This indicator shows the Four-Wheel Drive

(4WD) driving mode (AUTO, 4HI or 4LO) that is selected by the 4WD shift switch. (See “INFINITI

ALL-MODE 4WD

姞” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

17. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system MAIN switch indicator (if so equipped)

The indicator is displayed when the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system main switch is pushed. When the main switch is pushed again, the indicator disappears. While the main switch indicator is displayed, the ICC system is operational. (See “INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL

(ICC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

2-24

Instruments and controls

18. Distance Control Assist (DCA) system switch indicator (if so equipped)

The indicator is displayed when the Distance

Control Assist (DCA) system switch is pushed on. When the switch is pushed again, the indicator disappears. While the indicator is displayed, the DCA system is operational. (See

“DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

SIC4325

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE

1. Engine oil replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes for changing the engine oil. You can set or reset the distance for changing the engine oil. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

2. Oil filter replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

3. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires. (See “TRIP COM-

PUTER” later in this section.)

4. “OTHER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing the items. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

Instruments and controls

2-25

More maintenance reminders are also available on the center display. (See “HOW TO USE INFO

BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.)

2-26

Instruments and controls

SIC4494

SIC4420

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are located on the right side of the combination meter panel.

To operate the trip computer, push the switches as shown above.

switch switch

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the switch

.

Each time the switch is pushed, the display will change as follows:

Current fuel consumption

→ Average fuel consumption and speed

→ Elapsed time and trip odometer

→ Distance to empty (dte) → Outside air temperature (ICY)

→ Setting → Warning check

1. Current and average fuel consumption

The current and average fuel consumption mode shows the current and average fuel consumption.

2. Average fuel consumption (MPG or l (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or km/h)

Fuel consumption :

The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the switch

䊊 for longer than 1 second. (The average speed is also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the display shows “——”.

Speed :

The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows

“——”.

3. Elapsed time and trip odometer

(MILES or km)

Elapsed time :

The elapsed time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pushing the switch for longer than

1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the same time.)

Trip odometer :

The trip odometer mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the switch

䊊 for longer than 1 second. (The elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

Instruments and controls

2-27

4. Distance to empty (dte — MILES or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is displayed on the screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte display will change to “——”.

● If the amount of fuel added is small, the display just before the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position may continue to be displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

5. Outside air temperature (ICY — °F or °C)

The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or

°C in the range of

⫺22 to 131°F (⫺30 to 55°C).

2-28

Instruments and controls

The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature. If the outside air temperature is below 37°F (3°C), the warning is displayed on the screen.

The outside temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind directions and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards.

6. Setting

Setting cannot be made while driving. A message “Setting can only be operated when stopped” is also displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display.

The switch and switch are used in the setting mode to select and decide a menu.

SKIP :

Push the switch warning check mode.

to move to the

Push the menus.

switch to select other

ALERT :

There are 3 submenus under the alert menu.

● BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top page of the setting mode.

● TIMER

Select this submenu to specify when the

“TIMER” indicator activates.

● ICY

Select this submenu to display the low outside temperature warning.

MAINTENANCE :

There are 5 submenus under the maintenance menu.

● BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top page of the setting mode.

● OIL

Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for changing the engine oil.

● FILTER

Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter.

SECURITY SYSTEMS

● TIRE

Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for replacing tires.

● OTHER

Select this submenu and set or reset the distance for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires.

OPTIONS :

There are 4 submenus under the display menu.

● BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top page of the setting mode.

● LANGUAGE

Select this submenu to choose English,

French or Spanish for display.

● UNIT

Select this submenu to choose the unit.

● EFFECTS

Select this submenu to turn on and off the meter/ring illumination and needle sweep function when starting the engine.

7. Warning check

SKIP :

Push the switch warning check mode.

to move to the

Push the menus.

switch to select other

DETAIL :

This item is available only when a warning is displayed.

Select this menu to see the details of warnings.

SIC2133

Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows:

● Vehicle security system

● INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood, or lift gate when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

Instruments and controls

2-29

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations.

Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in the vehicle, and always lock it when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your INFINITI retailer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

SIC2045

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the windows are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and lift gate. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch, power door lock switch or mechanical key.

5. Confirm that the security indicator light comes on. The security indicator light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed.

After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase. The security light begins to flash once every approximately 3 seconds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm time period, the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is pushed to ACC or ON, the system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood, and lift gate locked with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. When pushing the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again.

2-30

Instruments and controls

The alarm is activated by:

● Unlocking the door or opening the lift gate without using the button on the Intelligent

Key, the door handle request switch or the mechanical key. (Even if the door is opened by releasing the door inside lock knob, the alarm will activate.)

● Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop when a door is unlocked by pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent

Key, the door handle request switch or using the mechanical key, or when the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position.

If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by an INFINITI retailer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Intelligent Key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.

SIC2045

Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on the meter panel. It indicates the status of the

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the ignition switch was in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.

If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Instruments and controls

2-31

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see an INFINITI retailer for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all Intelligent Keys that you have when visiting an INFINITI retailer for service.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the window and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the window with the defroster before you wash the window.

If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.

CAUTION

Do not operate the washer continuously for

more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the reservoir

tank is empty.

Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank

with washer fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with wa-

ter to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

2-32

Instruments and controls

SIC4492

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

AUTO — operates the rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See “RAIN-SENSING AUTO

WIPER SYSTEM” later in this section.)

LO — continuous low speed operation

HI — continuous high speed operation

MIST — one sweep operation of the wiper

WASHER OPERATION

To operate the washer, pull the lever toward the back of the vehicle

䊊 until the desired amount of washer fluid is spread on the windshield. The wiper will automatically operate several times.

The headlight washer (if so equipped) will also operate with operation of the windshield washer. (See “HEADLIGHT WASHER” later in this section.)

Wiper drip wipe system:

The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds after the washer and wiper are operated.

This operation is to wipe washer fluid that has dripped on the windshield.

SIC4258

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYSTEM

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located on the upper part of the windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push the lever down to the AUTO position

. The wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Instruments and controls

2-33

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front or toward the rear

(Low).

● High — High sensitive operation

(High)

● Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, push up the lever to the OFF position, or pull down the lever to the LO or HI position.

CAUTION

Do not touch the rain sensor and around it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause to an injury or a wiper damage.

The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for

use during rain. If the switch is left in the

AUTO position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor.

The wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor.

The rain-sensing auto wipers may not oper-

ate if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is raining.

When the windshield glass is coated with

water repellent, the speed of the rainsensing auto wipers may be higher even though the amount of the rainfall is small.

Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper

system when you use a car wash.

Using genuine wiper blades is recommended

for proper operation of the rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See “WINDSHIELD WIPER

BLADES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section for wiper blade replacement.)

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the rear window glass and obscure your vision. Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window.

CAUTION

Do not operate the washer continuously for

more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the reservoir

tank is empty.

Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank

with washer fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with wa-

ter to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

2-34

Instruments and controls

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR

DEFROSTER/WINDSHIELD DEICER (if so equipped) SWITCH

If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow etc., the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow etc. on and around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch ON again to operate the wiper.

SIC4259

The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward

䊊 to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times.

SIC4385

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR

DEFROSTER

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch

䊊 on. The indicator light

䊊 will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls

2-35

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

WINDSHIELD DEICER (if so equipped)

The windshield deicer switch (rear window and outside mirror defroster switch) operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The deicer is used to remove ice from the windshield when a wiper is frozen to the windshield.

When the switch light

䊊 is pushed, the indicator illuminates and the deicer operates for approximately 15 minutes. The rear window defroster will activate at the same time. After the preset time has passed, the deicer will turn off automatically. To turn off the deicer manually, push the deicer switch again, and the indicator light turns off.

CAUTION

When operating the deicer continuously, be

sure to start the engine. Otherwise, it may cause the battery to discharge.

When cleaning the inner side of the window,

be careful not to scratch or damage the electrical conductors on the surface of the window.

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce

a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at an INFINITI retailer.

Xenon headlights provide considerably

more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer and have the headlights adjusted correctly.

2-36

Instruments and controls

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

The life of xenon headlights will be shortened

by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on.

This way the life of the xenon headlights is not reduced.

If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burn-

ing out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact an

INFINITI retailer.

SIC3267

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on.

Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

SIC3268

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position

.

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, or position.

Instruments and controls

2-37

The autolight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light.

For US models: The headlights will also be turned on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights remain on for 5 minutes.

Automatic headlights off delay :

You can keep the headlights on for up to 180 seconds after you push the ignition switch to

OFF and open any door then close all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the automatic headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180 seconds. The factory default setting is 45 seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay setting, see

“Light Off Delay” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.

SAA0642A

Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor

located on the top of the instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.

SIC3269

Headlight beam select

To select the low beam, put the lever in the neutral position as shown.

To select the high beam, push the lever forward while the switch is in the position. Pull it back to select the low beam.

Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam even when the headlight switch is in the OFF position.

2-38

Instruments and controls

Battery saver system

A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the light switch in the or position and the ignition switch in the

OFF or LOCK position.

When the headlight switch is in the or position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the lights will automatically turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF position.

When the headlight switch remains in the or position after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

CAUTION

When you turn on the headlight switch again

after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will not turn off automatically. Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will be discharged.

Never leave the light switch on when the

engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically.

WARNING

Xenon headlights are extremely bright compared to conventional headlights. If the xenon headlights hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of oncoming vehicle, the driver of these vehicles may have difficulty driving because of the brightness. Use the headlight aiming control switch to lower the light axis. See “XENON HEADLIGHTS” earlier in this section for additional information.

SIC2275

Headlight aiming control (if so equipped)

Depending on the number of occupants in the vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may directly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The light axis can be lowered with the operation of the switch.

The larger the number designated on the switch, the lower the axis.

When traveling with no heavy load or on a flat road, select position 0.

Daytime running light system

(Canada only)

The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the headlight switch to the position. Turn the position for full illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

Instruments and controls

2-39

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights.

Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

(if so equipped)

The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) will automatically adjust the headlights (low beam) toward the turning direction to improve the driver’s view. When the headlight switch is ON and the driver operates the steering wheel in a turn, the AFS system will be activated.

The AFS will operate:

● when the headlight switch is ON.

● when the selector lever is in any position other than P (Park) or R (Reverse).

● when the vehicle is driven at above 16 MPH

(25 km/h) for the left-side headlight. Note that the right-side low beam headlight will swivel but the left side will not swivel when the vehicle is at a stop and the steering wheel is turned. The vehicle must attain a speed above 16 MPH (25 km/h) before AFS activates the left-side headlight.

SIC4473

To turn the AFS off, push the AFS switch. (The

AFS OFF indicator light will illuminate.) Push the switch again to turn the system on again.

AFS will also adjust the headlight to a proper axis automatically, depending on the number of occupants in the vehicle, the load the vehicle is carrying and the road conditions.

If the AFS OFF indicator light blinks after the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON position, this may indicate that the AFS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer. When the engine is started, the headlights will vibrate to check the system condition. This is not a malfunction.

2-40

Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT WASHER (if so equipped)

The headlight washer operates when the headlight is on and the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Pull the windshield washer switch toward you.

The headlight washer operates with the windshield washer operation. This operation activates once each time either the ignition switch or the headlight switch is turned off and on.

After the first operation, the headlight washer operates once at every fifth operation of the windshield washer.

CAUTION

Do not operate the washer continuously for

longer than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the headlight washer if the

window washer fluid reservoir is empty.

SIC3270

SIC4378

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control switch can be operated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. When the switch is operated, the dot matrix liquid crystal display switches to the brightness adjustment mode.

Push the upper switch

䊊 to brighten the instrument panel lights. The bar

䊊 moves to the + side. When reaching the maximum brightness, “MAX” appears on the display

.

Push the lower switch panel lights. The bar

1

to dim the instrument moves to the

⫺ side.

When reaching the minimum brightness, “MIN” appears on the display

. However, “MIN” does not appear during the nighttime.

Instruments and controls

2-41

The dot matrix liquid crystal display returns to the normal display under the following conditions:

● when the instrument brightness control switch is not operated for more than 5 seconds.

● when the or switch on the right side of the combination meter panel is pushed.

SIC3271

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.

SIC3272

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the switch to the position. To turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate.

When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, turning the fog light switch to the position will turn on the headlights, fog lights and the other lights while the ignition switch is in the ON position or the engine is running.

2-42

Instruments and controls

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH HEATED STEERING WHEEL

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING

If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

Do not use the hazard warning flashers while

moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

Turn signals do not work when the hazard

warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch in any position.

When an impact that could activate the supplemental air bags is detected, the hazard warning flasher lights blink automatically. If the hazard warning flasher switch is pushed twice, the hazard warning flashers will turn off.

WARNING

Do not turn the hazard warning flasher switch to off until you can make sure that it is safe to do so. Also, the hazard flasher warning may not blink automatically depending on the force of impact.

SIC4401

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light

䊊 on the switch will illuminate.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on.

Instruments and controls

2-43

HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will turn off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel.

This is not a malfunction.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat.

Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

SIC4444

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

The battery could run down if the seat heater

is operated while the engine is not running.

Do not use the seat heater for extended pe-

riods or when no one is using the seat.

Do not put anything on the seat which insu-

lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

Do not place anything hard or heavy on the

seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.

This may result in damage to the heater.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should

be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline,

thinner, or any similar materials.

2-44

Instruments and controls

If any abnormalities are found or the heated

seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

3. To turn off the heater, push the “HI” or

“LO” side (whichever is selected) of the switch. Make sure the indicator light turns off.

SIC2770

FRONT

The front seats can be warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the instrument panel can be operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

● For high heat, push the HI (High) side of the switch

.

● For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of the switch

.

● The indicator light the heater is on.

will illuminate when

Instruments and controls

2-45

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if so equipped)

SIC2770

REAR

The 2nd row outboard seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the back side of the center console can be operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

For high heat, push the HI (High) side of the switch.

For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of the switch.

The indicator light in the switch illuminate when the heater is on.

will

2-46

Instruments and controls

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to the level position. Make sure the indicator light goes off.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the switch.

SIC4334

The climate controlled seat warms up or cools down the front seats by blowing warm or cool air from the surface of the seat. The switches located on the instrument panel can be operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob

䊊 or to the cool side light nate.

䊊 to the heat side

. The indicator on the control knob will illumi-

3. Adjust the temperature using the control knob

.

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or cooled, and/or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the control knob to the OFF position (center). The indicator light

䊊 on the control knob goes off at the OFF position.

To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat, contact an INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat.

Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

The battery could run down if the climate

controlled seat is operated while the engine is not running.

Do not use the climate controlled seat for

extended periods or when no one is using the seat.

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (Type A) (if so equipped)

Do not put anything on the seat which insu-

lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

Do not place anything hard or heavy on the

seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.

This may result in damage to the climate controlled seat.

Any liquid spilled on the seat should be re-

moved immediately with a dry cloth.

The climate controlled seat has an air filter.

Do not operate climate controlled seat without an air filter. This may result in damage to the system.

When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline,

thinner, or any similar materials.

If any malfunctions are found or the climate

controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

SSD0956

The warning systems switch will turn on and off the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system, the

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system and the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system at the same time.

The LDW system will sound a warning chime and blink the lane departure warning light

(orange) to alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane with detectable lane markers.

(See “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/ PRE-

VENTION (LDP) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Instruments and controls

2-47

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (Type B) (if so equipped)

The BSW system will illuminate the BSW indicator lights, located next to the outside mirrors, when the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone. If the turn signal is activated in the direction of the detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the BSW indicator light will flash. (See “BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SYS-

TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

The FCW system will sound a warning chime and the vehicle ahead detection indicator light blinks to alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling close to the vehicle ahead. (See “FORWARD

COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

The warning systems switch is automatically turned on when the engine is started, and the warning systems ON indicator

䊊 on the switch illuminates.

To cancel the warning systems, push the warning systems switch to turn off the system. The warning systems ON indicator will turn off.

NOTE:

If you continue to push the warning systems switch from off to on for over 4 seconds, a chime will sound. This will change the default status of the LDW, BSW and FCW systems to OFF so that these systems will not automatically turn on when the engine is started. If this procedure is repeated, the default status will return to ON.

SSD0956

The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the warning systems (Forward Collision

Warning (FCW), Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Blind Spot Warning (BSW) systems) that are activated using the settings menu on the center display.

When the warning systems switch is turned off, the indicator

䊊 on the switch is off. The indicator will also be off if all of the warning systems are deactivated using the settings menu.

2-48

Instruments and controls

SNOW MODE SWITCH TOW MODE SWITCH

The FCW system will sound a warning chime and the vehicle ahead detection indicator light blinks to alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling close to the vehicle ahead. (See “FORWARD

COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

The LDW system will sound a warning chime and blink the lane departure warning light

(orange) to alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane with detectable lane markers.

(See “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING

(LDW)/PREVENTION (LDP) SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

The BSW system will turn on the BSW indicator lights, located next to the outside mirrors, if the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone. If the turn signal is activated in the direction of the detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the BSW indicator light will flash. (See “BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SYS-

TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

SIC4454 SIC4474

For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy roads or slippery areas, push on the SNOW mode switch. The SNOW mode indicator light will illuminate. When the SNOW mode is activated, engine output is controlled to avoid wheel spin.

Push off the SNOW mode for normal driving.

TOW MODE should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle in TOW MODE with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced, and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.

Instruments and controls

2-49

Push the TOW MODE switch to activate TOW

MODE. The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illuminates when TOW MODE is selected.

Push the TOW MODE switch again to turn TOW

MODE OFF.

TOW MODE is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) OFF

SWITCH (if so equipped)

The IBA system will remain in the last ON or OFF state it was left in until it is manually changed by pushing the IBA OFF switch.

See “INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

SIC3844

The vehicle should be driven with the Intelligent

Brake Assist (IBA) system on for most driving conditions.

The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system will sound a warning chime to alert the driver when the vehicle is traveling too close to the vehicle ahead and will apply the brake control if necessary.

To turn off the system, push the IBA OFF switch.

The indicator will illuminate.

2-50

Instruments and controls

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF

SWITCH

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE

DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

CLOCK

SIC4455

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.

If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will illuminate.

SIC3325

If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

1. To set the clock forward, push the button

.

2. To set the clock backward, push the button

.

3. To move forward or backward faster, push and hold the button more than 5 seconds.

Instruments and controls

2-51

POWER OUTLET

For details about display clock adjustment (if so equipped), see “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.

CAUTION

Use power outlet with the engine running to

avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Avoid using power outlet when the air condi-

tioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.

Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be

sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do

not allow water to contact the outlet.

Instrument panel

SIC4445

Center console

SIC4453

2-52

Instruments and controls

Back side of front console

SIC4456

SIC4391

Type A

The power outlet is used for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION

The outlet and plug may be hot during or

immediately after use.

Do not use with accessories that exceed a

combined power draw of 12 volts, 120W (10A) for all the power outlets. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

This power outlet is not designed for use

with a cigarette lighter unit.

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good

contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow.

Main switch

SIC2648

Type B (if so equipped)

The power outlet (plug type) is located on the back side of the front console. It can operate when the ignition switch in the ON position and the main switch (located in the console box) is

ON.

The specification of this power outlet is for use of a 120 volt, 150W (1.25A) power draw.

To turn on or off the power supply to the outlet, push the ON

䊊 or OFF

䊊 side of the main switch. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the indicator light will illuminate.

Luggage room

Instruments and controls

2-53

STORAGE

Power outlet

Pull up the cover and plug in.

After using the power outlet, be sure to turn off the main switch.

CAUTION

Do not use with accessories that exceed a

120 volt, 150W (1.25A) power draw.

Use this power outlet with the engine run-

ning. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.)

SIC4451

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the

cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard

objects can injure you in an accident.

Do not recline the rear seatback when you

use the cup holders on the rear armrest. Doing so may cause the beverages to spill over, and if they are hot, they may scald the passengers.

SIC4495

Front

To open the cup holder, push the lid

.

To close, lower the cup holder lid and push it down lightly.

2-54

Instruments and controls

Pull up the inside tray

䊊 larger container or cleaning.

and remove it for a

The cap of the bottle can be placed on

.

A small beverage can be placed in the cup holder

.

The cup holder is not designed to store personal items.

SIC3118

Type A

2nd row seat

Type A :

To open the cup holder, push the lid

.

The flap will be folded down when inserting a large container.

To close, lower the cup holder lid and push it down lightly.

To clean the front cup holder, pull up the inside tray

䊊 and remove it.

The cup holder is not designed to store personal items.

Type B

Type B :

To open the cup holder, pull the lid.

SIC2915

Instruments and controls

2-55

3rd row seat

SIC4419 SIC4501

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

Do not use bottle holder for any other ob-

jects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.

Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

SIC3246

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident.

To open the sunglasses holder, push

.

2-56

Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Do not use for anything other than glasses.

Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses

holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses.

SIC4393

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle

.

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.

To lock

/unlock

䊊 the glove box, use the mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage, see “KEYS” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Front

SIC4470

CONSOLE BOX

Front

To open the console box, push up the knob and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

Instruments and controls

2-57

SIC4422

Rear (if so equipped)

To open the lid, push the knob up up the lid.

and pull

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

SIC4423

Pocket :

To open the pocket, pull the knob

.

To close, push the lid until the lock latches.

SIC4493

TRAY

To open the tray, push the lid push the lid down.

. To close,

The USB and/or iPod

姞 connector port is located inside the tray. (See “AUDIO SYSTEM” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section or “iPod

姞 PLAYER

OPERATION” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.)

2-58

Instruments and controls

Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

The child restraint top tether strap may be

damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area.

Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat

and using a seat belt properly.

SIC3505

COAT HOOKS

The coat hooks are equipped at the rear assist grips.

CAUTION

Do not place items which are more than 2 lb (1 kg) on the hook.

SIC4446

LUGGAGE HOOKS

WARNING

Always make sure that the cargo is properly

secured. Use the suitable ropes and hooks.

Unsecured cargo can become dangerous in

an accident or sudden stop.

Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage

area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 22 lb (10 kg)

or 7 lb (3 kg) to the hook.

Instruments and controls

2-59

SIC4417

CARGO FLOOR BOX

Push the handle to open the cargo floor board

. Remove the strap

䊊 from the back side of the board, and hang it on the opening of the lift gate as shown.

SIC4447

ROOF RACK

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof rack. Do not load more than 221 lb (100 kg) on the roof rails. Observe the maximum load limit shown on the crossbars or roof carriers when you attach them on the roof rails. Contact an

INFINITI retailer for crossbar or other equipment information.

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and rear). The

GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S.

or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (located on the driver’s door pillar). For more information regarding GVWR and GAWR, see “VEHICLE LOAD-

ING INFORMATION” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.

WARNING

Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is

loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the roof rack.

Heavy loading of the roof rack has the poten-

tial to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or unusual handling maneuvers.

Roof rack load should be evenly distributed.

Do not exceed maximum roof rack load

weight capacity.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

2-60

Instruments and controls

WINDOWS

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack. If you cannot comfortably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a ladder or stool.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

Make sure that all passengers have their

hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.

Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in the window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened during this period of about

45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

SIC3279

Main power window switch (driver’s side)

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Rear right passenger side window

5. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push down pull up

䊊 or the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

Instruments and controls

2-61

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button

䊊 is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

SIC3241

Passenger side power window switch

The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it.

SIC3289

Automatic operation

To fully open or close the window, completely push down or pull up the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just push or lift the switch in the opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause the window to open or close until the switch is released.

2-62

Instruments and controls

MOONROOF

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

If the windows do not close automatically

If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window completely by operating the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete.

6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other windows.

If the power window automatic function does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

In an accident you could be thrown from the

vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.

Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend

any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from

the moonroof before opening.

Do not place any heavy object on the moon-

roof or surrounding area.

Instruments and controls

2-63

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The automatic moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the passenger’s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is canceled.

To stop the roof, push the switch once more while it is opening or closing.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

SIC3243

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatically when the moonroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the UP

䊊 side of the moonroof switch and release it; it need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the DOWN

䊊 side.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push the

OPEN

䊊 or CLOSE

䊊 side of the moonroof switch and release it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically open or close all the way.

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof when it is closing, the moonroof will be immediately opened.

The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

If the moonroof cannot be closed automatically when the auto reverse function activates due to a malfunction, push and hold the CLOSE

䊊 side of the moonroof switch.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs.

2-64

Instruments and controls

WELCOME LIGHT

If the moonroof does not operate

If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by repeatedly pushing the CLOSE

䊊 side of the moonroof switch.

2. Push and hold the CLOSE

䊊 side of the moonroof switch to tilt the moonroof up.

3. Release the moonroof switch after the moonroof moves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the OPEN

䊊 side of the moonroof switch to fully tilt the moonroof down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch operates normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer.

SIC3642

To activate or deactivate the welcome light function, perform the following procedure. Note that the function is set to disabled as the factory default setting.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Open the driver’s side door.

3. Within 20 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, push the door open request switch on the driver’s side door handle for more than 5 seconds with the driver’s door open.

4. A chime sounds when the setting is completed.

Once the welcome light function is active, the puddle light

䊊 and the passenger cabin illumination will illuminate when you approach the vehicle with the Intelligent Key (within approximately 3.3 ft (1 m) of the antenna built inside the door handles) and the following conditions are met.

● All doors are closed and locked.

● The ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position.

● The Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.

● The puddle light operates within a set duration.

Instruments and controls

2-65

INTERIOR LIGHTS

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

The welcome light function will be deactivated automatically to prevent battery discharge under the following conditions. To activate the welcome light function again, unlock any door.

● If the welcome light function does not operate within a set duration. Note that the duration is set to 9 days as the factory default setting.

● If the welcome light function is activated 15 consecutive times when you approach and leave the vehicle with the Intelligent Key without the doors being unlocked.

SIC3249

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on or off.

SIC3250

REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on or off.

2-66

Instruments and controls

SIC3251

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

The interior light control switch has three positions: ON, DOOR and OFF.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position

䊊 the map lights and rear personal lights will illuminate.

DOOR position

When the switch is in the DOOR position

, the map lights and rear personal lights will illuminate under the following conditions:

● ignition switch is switched to the LOCK or

OFF position

– remain on for about 15 seconds.

● doors are unlocked by pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key or door handle request switch with the ignition switch in the

LOCK or OFF position

– remain on for about 15 seconds.

● any door is opened and then closed with the ignition switch in the LOCK or OFF position

– remain on for about 15 seconds.

● any door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position

– remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go off.

The lights will also turn off after 30 minutes when the lights remain illuminated after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF or

LOCK position to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

When the auto interior illumination is set to the

OFF position (see “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND

SETTINGS” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section), the lights will illuminate under the following condition:

● any door is opened with the ignition switch in any position

– remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go off.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position

, the lights will not illuminate, regardless of the condition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

Instruments and controls

2-67

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT HOMELINK

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

SIC4448

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.

The lights will also turn off after 30 minutes when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

SIC4418

The cargo light switch has three positions: ON

, center and OFF

.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position cargo light will illuminate.

, the

Center position

When the switch is in the center position

, the cargo light will illuminate when the lift gate is opened.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position cargo light will not illuminate.

, the

HomeLink

姞 Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink

姞 Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink

姞 will retain all programming.

Once HomeLink

Universal Transceiver is pro-

grammed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink

Universal Transceiver

buttons should be erased for security purposes.

For additional information, see “PROGRAMMING

HomeLink

” later in this section.

2-68

Instruments and controls

WARNING

Do not use HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver

with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

During programming procedure, your garage

door or security gate may open or close.

Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off

while programming HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK

To program your HomeLink

姞 Universal Transceiver to operate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, home or office lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device. Note:

Garage door openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling code protection”. To program a garage door opener equipped with “rolling code protection”; you will need to use a ladder to get up to the garage door opener motor to be able to access the “smart or learn” program button.

SIC3612

1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer

HomeLink

姞 buttons (to clear the memory) until the indicator light

䊊 blinks (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches away from the

HomeLink

姞 surface.

Instruments and controls

2-69

SIC3613

3. Using both hands, simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink

姞 button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on HomeLink

姞 flashes, changing from a “slow blink” to a “rapid blink”.

This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light blinks rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other programmed device, push and hold the programmed HomeLink

姞 button - releasing when the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on HomeLink

姞 blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink

姞 has picked up a “rolling code” garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train HomeLink

姞, completing the programming may require a ladder and another person for convenience.

6. Push and release the program button located on the garage door opener’s motor to activate the “training mode”. This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the training button.

NOTE:

Once you have pushed and released the training button on the garage door opener’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.

For convenience, use the help of a second person to assist when performing this step.

7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing and releasing the garage door opener training button) and firmly push and release the HomeLink

姞 button you’ve just programmed.

Push and release the

HomeLink

姞 button up to three times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink

姞 button should now be programmed.

To program the remaining

HomeLink

姞 buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2 through 8 only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to “clear” all previously programmed HomeLink

buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink

姞 buttons, please refer to the HomeLink

姞 web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

2-70

Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK

姞 FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required handheld transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink

姞, continue to push and hold the HomeLink

姞 button (note steps 2 through 4 under “Programming HomeLink

姞”) while you push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener, etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

HomeLink

姞 Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply push the appropriate programmed HomeLink

姞 Universal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS

If HomeLink

姞 does not quickly learn the handheld transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink

姞 surface.

● push and hold both the HomeLink姞 and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in

(50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink

姞 surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink

姞 is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to clear all programming, push and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (in approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK

姞 BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink

姞 Universal Transceiver button, complete the following.

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink

姞 button.

Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink

姞 surface.

3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

4. The HomeLink

姞 indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.

The HomeLink

姞 Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink

姞 button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed

HomeLink

姞 buttons.

Instruments and controls

2-71

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink

姞. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or retailer of those devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver

with your new transmitter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

2-72

Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Valet hand-off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Locking with mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Opening and closing windows with the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Intelligent Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Intelligent Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Battery saver system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Remote keyless entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . .3-15

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Operating manual lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Operating power lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Auto closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Lift gate release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Electric operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Inside mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Vanity mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Memory storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

KEYS

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see an INFINITI retailer for duplicates by using the key number. INFINITI does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by an INFINITI retailer.

SPA2717

1. Intelligent Key (2)

2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2)

3. Key number plate (1)

INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s

Intelligent Key system components and INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by an INFINITI retailer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle.

Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all

Intelligent Keys that you have to the INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you

when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note the following.

– The Intelligent Key is water resistant; however, wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

– Do not bend, drop or strike it against another object.

– Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

– Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

– Do not use a magnet key holder.

– Do not place the Intelligent Key near an electric appliance such as a television set or personal computer.

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

– Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come into contact with water or salt water, and do not wash it in a washing machine. This could affect the system function.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact an

INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key.

SPA2033

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors and the glove box.

See “DOORS” later in this section, “STORAGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

VALET HAND-OFF

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, keeping the mechanical key in your pocket or bag for insertion into the Intelligent Key when you retrieve your vehicle.

See “STORAGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-3

DOORS

WARNING

Always have the doors locked while driving.

Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.

Before opening any door, always look for and

avoid oncoming traffic.

Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SPA2457B

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously using the mechanical key.

● Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle

䊊 will lock all doors.

● Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once to the rear of the vehicle

䊊 will unlock the driver’s door. After returning the key to the neutral position

, turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.

● You can switch the lock system to the mode that allows you to open all the doors when the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE

SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.)

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS

WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY

The driver’s door key operation also allows you to open and close all door windows.

To open the windows, turn the driver’s door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for

longer than

1 second . The door is unlocked and the window keeps opening while turning the key.

This function can also be performed by pushing and holding the door UNLOCK button of the

Intelligent Key. (See “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM” later in this section.)

To close the windows, turn the driver’s door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle for

longer

than 1 second . The door is locked and the window keeps closing while turning the key.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2744

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the inside lock knob to the lock position

.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position

.

Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.

SPA2300

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will lock or unlock all the doors. The switches are located on the driver’s and front passenger’s door armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power door lock switch to the lock position

.

Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.

To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler door, push the power door lock switch to the unlock position

.

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any door open, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

● All doors unlock automatically when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The automatic unlock function can be deacti-

vated or activated. To deactivate or activate the automatic door unlock system, perform the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2, push and hold the power door lock switch to the position (UNLOCK) for more than 5 seconds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-5

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the

OFF and ON position again between each setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric

medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves

when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises that the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored during a flight.

SPA2745

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety rear door locks help prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position

, the rear doors can be opened only from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the unlock position

.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you

when operating the vehicle.

Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle

when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The

Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions.

● When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.

● When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a battery, see “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACE-

MENT” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.

Because the steering wheel is locked electrically, unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which con-

tains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If

the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

If the outside temperature is below 14°F

(

10°C), the battery of the Intelligent Key

may not function properly.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-

tended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-7

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact an INFINITI retailer.

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch

.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the

Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch

.

SPA2074

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

SPA2326

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the key with you and then lock the doors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

● The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing doors with the door handle request switch) can be set to remain inactive. (See “VEHICLE

INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.)

SPA2408

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out from your pocket or bag.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-9

SPA2779

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch (driver’s or front passenger’s)

䊊 or the lift gate request switch within the range of operation.

When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift gate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode” later in this section.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s) lift gate request switch

䊊 or the while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key while any door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door handle request switch with the Intelligent

Key inside the vehicle.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another registered Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the request

switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles.

When locking the doors using the request

switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.

The request switch is operational only when

the Intelligent Key has been detected by the

Intelligent Key system.

SPA2780

3-10

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Lockout protection :

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door. Put the intelligent key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:

When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of

the instrument panel.

When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the

glove box or a storage bin.

When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the

door pockets.

When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or

near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the door handle request switch (driver’s or front passenger’s) gate request switch

䊊 or the lift once while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

When you approach the vehicle with the

Intelligent Key, the puddle light and the passenger cabin illumination will illuminate and stay on for a short period of time. (See

“WELCOME LIGHT” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and outside chime sounds once. The corresponding door will unlock.

The fuel-filler door will also unlock when the driver’s door handle request switch is pushed.

3. Push the door handle request switch again within 60 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and outside chime sounds once again. All the doors will unlock.

The fuel-filler door will also unlock when the front passenger’s door handle or lift gate request switch is pushed.

The lift gate can be unlocked and opened by pushing the lift gate opener switch. See “LIFT

GATE” later in this section.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch while the doors are locked. If during this

1-minute time period, the request switch is pushed, all doors will be locked automatically after another 1 minute.

● Opening any door

● Pushing the ignition switch

Power lift gate open

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the power lift gate opener switch

.

3. The lift gate will unlock and automatically open.

4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-11

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met for 60 minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply to prevent battery discharge.

● The ignition switch is in the ACC position, and

● All doors are closed, and

● The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and a warning displays in the dot matrix liquid crystal display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning displays, be sure to check the vehicle and

Intelligent Key.

See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in this section and “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DIS-

PLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

3-12

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine

Symptom

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously or for a few seconds.

When shifting the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

When opening the driver’s door to get out of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The inside warning chime sounds continuously.

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The NO KEY warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for a few seconds.

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds and all the doors unlock.

When pushing the request switch or the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

Possible cause

The selector lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

OFF position and the selector lever is not in the P (Park) position.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or luggage room.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

A door is not closed securely.

Action to take

Shift the selector lever to the P

(Park) position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Move the selector lever to the P

(Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Close the door securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-13

When pushing the door handle request switch to lock the door

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine

When pushing the ignition switch

Symptom

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears on the display.

Possible cause

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or luggage room.

A door is not closed securely.

The door handle request switch is pushed before the door is closed.

The battery charge is low.

The NO KEY warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key system warning light in the meter illuminates in yellow.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

It warns of a malfunction with the electrical steering lock system or the

Intelligent Key system.

Action to take

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Close the door securely.

Push the door handle request switch after the door is closed.

Replace the battery with a new one.

(See “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Contact an INFINITI retailer.

3-14

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

WARNING

The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises that radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel-filler door, activate the panic alarm and open the windows by pushing the buttons on the Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft

(10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.)

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact an INFINITI retailer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the Intelligent

Key will not operate when:

● the distance between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).

● the Intelligent Key battery runs down.

After locking with the remote keyless entry function, pull the door handle to make sure the doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies depending on the environment. To securely operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.

SPA2436

LOCK button

UNLOCK button

Power lift gate button

PANIC button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM

When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift gate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode” later in this section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-15

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors and the lift gate.*2

3. Push the LOCK

Intelligent Key.

button on the

4. All the doors, the lift gate and fuel-filler door will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key while any door is open.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the UNLOCK

Intelligent Key once.

button on the

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The driver’s door and fuel-filler door will unlock.

The puddle light and the passenger cabin illumination will illuminate and stay on for a short period of time.

3-16

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Push the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key again within 60 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again.

All the doors will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key while the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time period, the

UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will be locked automatically after another 1 minute.

● Opening any door

● Pushing the ignition switch

Opening windows

To open the windows, push the door UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key for

about 3

seconds after the door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK button.

Window cannot be closed using the Intelligent

Key.

The door windows can be opened or closed by turning the mechanical key in a door lock. (See

“DOORS” earlier in this section.)

Opening/closing lift gate (if so equipped)

1. Push the power lift gate button

䊊 for more than 1 second.

2. The lift gate will automatically open.

The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

To close the lift gate, push the power lift gate button

.

The lift gate will automatically close.

If the button

䊊 is pushed while the lift gate is being opened or closed, the lift gate will reverse.

The power lift gate button

䊊 cannot be operated when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button

䊊 on the

Intelligent Key for

more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

● It has run for 25 seconds, or

● Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button should be pushed for more than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK button

䊊 is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK button

䊊 is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle request switch)

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or button)

Hazard indicator mode:

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle request switch)

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or button)

DOOR LOCK

HAZARD -

twice

OUTSIDE CHIME -

twice

HAZARD -

twice

HORN -

once

DOOR LOCK

HAZARD -

twice

HAZARD -

twice

DOOR UNLOCK

HAZARD -

once

OUTSIDE CHIME -

once

HAZARD -

once

HORN - none

DOOR UNLOCK

HAZARD - none

HAZARD - none

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-17

HOOD

Switching procedure :

Push the LOCK

䊊 and UNLOCK

䊊 buttons on the Intelligent Key simultaneously for more than 2 seconds to switch the mode from one to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

䊊 located below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever

䊊 up at the front of the hood with your fingertips and raise the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood down and make sure it locks into place.

SPA2775

WARNING

Make sure the hood is completely closed and

latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.

If you see steam or smoke coming from the

engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

3-18

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LIFT GATE

WARNING

Always be sure the lift gate has been closed

securely to prevent it from opening while driving.

Do not drive with the lift gate open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “EXHAUST GAS

(carbon monoxide)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

Always be sure that hands and feet are clear

of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the lift gate.

SPA2774

OPERATING MANUAL LIFT GATE

To open the lift gate, unlock it and push the lift gate opener switch

. Pull up the lift gate to open.

The lift gate can be unlocked by:

● pushing the unlock button

Intelligent Key twice.

on the

● pushing the lift gate request switch with the

Intelligent Key carried on you.

● pushing the door handle request switch twice with the Intelligent Key carried on you.

● pushing the power door lock switch to the unlock position.

● inserting the mechanical key into the driver’s door key cylinder and turning it to the rear of the vehicle twice.

To close the lift gate, pull down until it securely locks.

OPERATING POWER LIFT GATE

To operate the power lift gate, the selector lever must be in the P (Park) position.

The power lift gate will not operate if the battery voltage is low.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-19

SPA2547

Power lift gate main switch

The power lift gate operation can be turned on or off by the power lift gate main switch on the instrument panel.

When the power lift gate main switch is pushed to the “OFF” position, the power operation is not available by the power lift gate switch on the lift gate and lift gate opener switch.

SPA2793

Power lift gate switch — Instrument panel Intelligent Key

SPA2719

Lift gate opener switch

SPA2776

Power lift gate switch — Lift gate

SPA2796

3-20

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Power open

When the lift gate is fully closed, the lift gate will fully open automatically by:

● pushing the power lift gate switch instrument panel on the

● pushing the lift gate opener switch

● pushing the power lift gate button

C

Intelligent Key for more than 1 second on the

The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds when the lift gate starts opening.

NOTE:

The lift gate can be opened by the power lift gate switch

, the lift gate opener switch lift gate button

or the even if the lift gate is locked. The lift gate will individually unlock and open.

Power close

When the lift gate is fully opened, the lift gate will fully close automatically by:

● pushing the power lift gate switch instrument panel on the

● pushing the lift gate release button

䊊 the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second on

● pushing the power lift gate switch lower part of the lift gate on the

The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds when the lift gate starts closing.

NOTE:

When the lift gate is closed, it remains unlocked.

Manually lock the lift gate.

Reverse function

The power lift gate will reverse immediately if one of the following actions is performed during power open or power close.

● pushing the power lift gate switch instrument panel

● pushing the lift gate button the Intelligent Key.

on the on

● pushing the lift gate switch part of the lift gate on the lower

The outside chime sounds when the lift gate starts to reverse.

The power lift gate button

䊊 on the

Intelligent Key cannot be operated when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Auto reverse function

The auto-reverse function enables the lift gate to automatically reverse when something is caught in the lift gate as it is opening or closing.

When the control unit detects an obstacle, the lift gate will reverse and return to the full open or full close position.

If a second obstacle is detected, the lift gate motion will stop and the drive motor will disengage. The lift gate will enter the manual mode.

A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the lift gate. If an obstacle is detected by the pinch sensor during power close, the lift gate will reverse and return to the full open position immediately.

NOTE:

If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed, the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There is a small distance immediately before the closed position that cannot be detected.

Make sure that all passengers keep their hands, etc., clear from the lift gate opening before closing the lift gate.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-21

Manual mode

If power operation is not available, the lift gate can be operated manually. Power operation may not be available if multiple obstacles have been detected in a single power cycle or if the battery voltage is low. When the power lift gate main switch is in the OFF position, the lift gate can be opened manually by pushing the lift gate opener switch. If the power lift gate opener switch is pushed during power open or close, the power operation will be canceled and the lift gate can be operated manually.

SPA2777

Safe Mode

If the gas stays of the lift gate

䊊 lose pressure, the power lift gate safe mode is activated. When the safe mode is activated, the lift gate intermittently closes. Then the lift gate will be pulled to the closed and latched position by a motor.

The power lift gate cannot be opened using the switches at any time in the safe mode.

Do not operate the lift gate again until it is checked by an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

If the power lift gate does not stay open or if

the lift gate unexpectedly closes at any time, do not operate the lift gate. There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the lift gate gas stays. Have the lift gate inspected by an

INFINITI retailer.

Do not activate the power lift gate if one or

both of the lift gate gas stays are removed.

Damage to the lift gate or power lift gate mechanisms may occur.

3-22

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

AUTO CLOSURE

If the lift gate is pulled down to a partly open position, the lift gate will pull itself to the closed position.

Do not apply excessive force when the auto closure is operating. Excessive force applied may cause the mechanism to malfunction.

CAUTION

The lift gate will automatically close from a

partly open position. To avoid pinching, keep hands and fingers away from lift gate opening.

Do not let children operate the lift gate.

SPA2778

LIFT GATE RELEASE LEVER

If the lift gate cannot be opened with the door lock switch due to a discharged battery, follow these steps.

1. Remove the cover

䊊 using a suitable tool.

inside of the lift gate

2. Move the lever the lift gate.

as illustrated to open

Contact an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible for repair.

SPA2752

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-filler door by using one of the following operations, then push the right side of the door.

● Push the driver’s door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key carried with you.

● Push the passenger’s door handle request switch or lift gate request switch twice with the Intelligent Key carried with you.

● Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent

Key.

● Insert the mechanical key into the door lock cylinder and rotate it towards the rear of the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-23

● Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and lock all doors by operating the door handle request switch, the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key, the mechanical key or the power door lock switch.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly

explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after

the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

Use only an original equipment type fuel-

filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body to at-

tempt to start your vehicle.

Do not fill a portable fuel container in the

vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it

away with water to avoid paint damage.

Insert the cap straight into the fuel-filler

tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the malfunction indicator light (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates because the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI retailer.

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning (if so equipped)

will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning (if so equipped) appears may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.

3-24

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Push the switch on the right side of the combination meter panel for longer than 1 second to turn off the LOOSE

FUEL CAP warning after tightening the fuel cap.

SPA2753

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.

SPA2815

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning (if so equipped)

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display when the fuelfiller cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the warning to be displayed.

To turn off the warning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. (See “FUEL-FILLER CAP” earlier in this section.)

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-25

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer

to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

SPA2754

ELECTRIC OPERATION

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever

䊊 to adjust the steering wheel up or down, forward or rearward to the desired position.

Entry/Exit function operation :

The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver’s door is opened with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily.

For more information, see “AUTOMATIC DRIVE

POSITIONER” later in this section.

3-26

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SUN VISORS

SIC3451

MIRRORS

CAUTION

Do not store the main sun visor before stor-

ing the extension sun visor.

Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly

downward.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor

.

2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side

.

3. Draw out the extension sun visor

䊊 from the main sun visor to block from further glare.

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the inside mirror to the desired position.

SPA2450-A

Automatic anti-glare type

The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the following vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automatically turned on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

When the anti-glare system is turned on, the indicator light

䊊 will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-27

Push the “

䡩” switch

䊊 to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally. The indicator light will turn off. Push the “I” switch to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the sensors

or apply glass cleaner on them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in improper operation.

For the HomeLink

姞 Universal Transceiver operation, see “HomeLink

姞 UNIVERSAL TRANS-

CEIVER” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

SPA2214

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the

passenger side are closer than they appear.

Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You

could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located at the lower part of the instrument panel.

The outside mirror will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Move the switch right

䊊 or left

䊊 to select the right or left side mirror, then adjust

䊊 using the control switch.

Defrosting outside mirrors

The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear window defroster switch is operated. (See

“REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR

DEFROSTER/WINDSHIELD DEICER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

3-28

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA1732A

CAUTION

Do not touch the mirrors while they are mov-

ing. Your hand may be pinched, and the mirror may malfunction.

Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You will

be unable to see behind the vehicle.

If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by

hand, there is a chance that the mirror will move forward or backward during driving. If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by hand, be sure to adjust them again electrically before driving.

Power foldable outside mirrors

The outside rearview mirror remote control operates when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push the outside rearview mirror folding switch to the

“CLOSE” position

“OPEN” position

.

. To unfold, push to the

If mirrors are manually operated or bumped, the mirror body can become loose at the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror operation, cycle mirrors by pushing the “CLOSE” switch until completely closed, then push “OPEN” until mirror is in the open position.

Reverse tilt-down feature

When backing up the vehicle, the right and left outside mirrors will turn downward automatically to provide better rear visibility.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Move the selector lever to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Choose the right or left outside mirror by operating the outside mirror control switch.

4. The outside mirror surfaces move downward.

When one of the following conditions has occurred, the outside mirror surfaces will return to their original positions.

● The selector lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse).

● The outside mirror control switch is set to the center position.

● The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-29

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

SIC4448

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun visor and pull up the cover.

The automatic drive positioner system has two features:

● Entry/exit function

● Memory storage

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat and steering column will automatically move when the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up when the driver’s door is opened with the ignition switch in the

LOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to the previous positions when the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC position.

The driver’s seat will not return to the previous positions if the seat or steering adjusting switch is operated when the seat is at the exit position.

Cancel or activate entry/exit function

The selector lever must be in the P (Park) position with the ignition switch in the OFF position.

The entry/exit function can be activated or canceled by pressing and holding the SET switch for more than 10 seconds.

The indicator lights on the memory switches (1 and 2) will blink once when the function is canceled, and the indicator lights will blink twice when the function is activated. Note that the indicator lights may illuminate after 5 seconds while holding the SET switch. This indicates readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to a stored memory position. Keep the SET switch pressed for more than 10 seconds to turn on or off the entry/exit function.

The entry/exit function can also be activated or canceled if the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit” key or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key is turned to ON or OFF in the “Comfort” settings. (See

“VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in the

“4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.)

3-30

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Initialize entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the entry/exit function will not work though this function was set on before. In such a case, after connecting the battery or replacing with a new fuse, open and close the driver’s door more than two times after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the

LOCK position. The entry/exit function will be activated.

SPA2756

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering column and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see

“SEATS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section and “TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING” page 3-26 and “OUTSIDE MIRRORS” earlier in this section.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.

If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-31

Linking Intelligent Key to a stored memory position

The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored memory position with the following procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory position.

2. While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 seconds, push the button on the Intelligent Key. If the indicator light blinks, the

Intelligent Key is linked to that memory setting.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position, and then push the button on the Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position.

Confirming memory storage

● Push the ignition switch to the ON position and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 second.

When the memory has stored in position, the indicator light will stay on for approximately

5 seconds.

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In

3-32

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

this case, reset the desired position using the previous procedure.

● If optional Intelligent Keys are added to your vehicle, the memory storage procedure to switch 1 or 2 and linking Intelligent Key procedure to a stored memory position should be performed again for each Intelligent Key. For additional Intelligent Key information, see “KEYS” earlier in this section.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Use one of the following methods to move the driver’s seat, the outside mirrors and the steering wheel.

● Push the ignition switch to the ON position and push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.

● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, steering column and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position or to the exit position when the entry/exit function is set to active with the indicator light flashing, and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions:

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h).

● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s seat and steering column is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating.

● When the memory switch 1 or 2 is not pushed for at least 1 second.

● When the seat, steering column and outside mirrors have already been moved to the memorized position.

● When no position is stored in the memory switch.

● When the engine is started while moving the automatic drive positioner.

● When the AT selector lever is moved from the

P (Park) position to any other position. (However, it will not be canceled if the switch is pushed while the seat and steering column are returning to the previous positions

(entry/exit function).)

● When the driver’s door remains open for more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position.

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-33

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Safety note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Center multi-function control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

How to use INFINITI controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

How to use touch screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Vehicle information and settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

How to use STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

How to use brightness control and display

ON/OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

How to use INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

How to use SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Around view™ monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

How to switch the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

How to see each view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Camera aiding corner sonar function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

How to adjust the screen view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Around view™ monitor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Ventilators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Servicing climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

DVD (DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC) player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Usb memory operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

Bluetooth

姞 streaming audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

iPod

姞 player operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Music box

姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Front auxiliary input jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Cd/dvd/usb memory care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . 4-80

Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio . . . . . . 4-81

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Dual head restraint DVD system (if so equipped) . . . . 4-83

System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Before operating dual head restraint DVD system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Playing Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Bluetooth

姞 Hands-Free Phone System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Regulatory information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

Phone selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

INFINITI Voice Recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

INFINITI Voice Recognition standard mode . . . . . . 4-106

Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109

INFINITI Voice Recognition alternate command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119

Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

SAFETY NOTE

WARNING

Do not disassemble or modify this system. If

you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.

Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

In case you notice any foreign object in the

system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest INFINITI retailer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric shock.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply

the parking brake to view the images on the front center display screen using devices connected to the auxiliary input jacks.

Positioning the heating or air conditioning

controls and display controls should not be done while driving so that full attention may be given to driving operation.

Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme temperature conditions [below

4°F (20°C)

and above 158°F (70°C)]. Operating this system under these conditions may result in system malfunctions.

4-2

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL

1. “CAMERA” Around View Monitor display button (P. 4-19)

2, 6, 7. For navigation system control buttons

(Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.)

3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-3)

4. “INFO” vehicle and navigation information button (P. 4-7)

5. “SETTING” button (P. 4-11)

8. “STATUS” status display button (P. 4-7)

9. “ OFF” brightness control and display ON/OFF button (P. 4-7)

SAA3020 SAA3025

HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display by rotating or pushing the center dial

䊊 and push the ENTER button upward/ downward,

䊊 for operation.

If you push the BACK button

䊊 before the setup is completed, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen. This button can also be used to delete characters that have been input.

After the setup is completed, push the BACK button

䊊 and return to the previous screen.

For the VOICE button

䊊 functions, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-3

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

CAUTION

The glass screen on the liquid crystal display

may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.

To clean the display, use a soft, dry cloth. If

additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.

Do not splash any liquid such as water or car

fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction.

To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system.

WARNING

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving.

Avoid using vehicle features that could dis-

tract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

SAA2473

Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations as those for the INFINITI controller are possible using the touch screen operation.

Selecting the item :

Touch an item to select it. To select the “Audio” settings, touch the “Audio” area

䊊 on the screen.

Touch the BACK previous screen.

button to return to the

4-4

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2474

Adjusting an item :

Touch the

+

settings.

or

⫺ button to adjust the

Touch the

䊊 or

䊊 move to the previous or next item.

Touch the

䊊 or

䊊 move to the previous or next page.

button to button to

SAA2475

Inputting characters :

Touch the letter or number

.

There are some options available when inputting characters.

Uppercase:

Shows uppercase characters.

Lowercase:

Shows lowercase characters.

Symbols:

Shows symbols such as the question mark

(?).

Space:

Inserts a space.

Delete:

Deletes the last character that has been input with one touch. Push and hold the button to delete all of the characters.

OK:

Completes character inputs.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-5

SAA3275 SAA2476

MENU OPTIONS

The start menu can be displayed using the menu control switch on the steering-wheelmounted controls.

1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is displayed, push and hold the menu control switch until the “Menu Options” screen appears.

2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting the menu control switch up or down, and then push the menu control switch to select it.

Available items

Destination/Route :

These items are for the navigation system. See the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual for details.

Info :

Displays the information screen. It is the same screen that appears when you push the INFO button.

Settings :

Displays the settings screen. It is the same screen that appears when you push the SET-

TING button.

4-6

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2477

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the display screen in menus. To select each key item, highlight the preferred item using the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.

Whenever a menu selection is made or menu item is highlighted, different areas on the screen provide you with important information.

See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current screen.

VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that menu screen.

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:

Shows that the INFINITI controller may be used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and select more options.

4. Menu Items Counter:

Shows the total number of items listed across all pages for the current menu.

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available) about the menu selection currently highlighted.

HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, air conditioner system, fuel consumption and navigation system, push the STATUS button. The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pushed repeatedly.

Audio and Air conditioner system

→ Audio and fuel economy

→ Audio and Navigation system

HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL

AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

Push the “ OFF” button to switch the display brightness to the daytime mode or the nighttime mode, and to adjust the display brightness using the INFINITI controller while the indicator is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Push and hold the “ OFF” button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON

The display screen shows vehicle and navigation information for your convenience.

The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle. See the following for details.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-7

SAA3144

Vehicle information display

1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.

2. Select an item from the INFO menu.

3. After viewing or adjusting the information on the following screens, push the BACK button to return to the INFO menu.

See the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual for the following items:

● Where am I?

● Traffic Info

● Weather Info

● Map Update

● Navigation Version*

* When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the “Navigation Version” key is displayed after selecting the “Others” key.

4-8

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2479

SAA2480

Fuel Economy information

The distance to empty, average fuel economy and current fuel economy will be displayed for reference.

To reset the average fuel economy (Avg Fuel

Econ), select the “Reset Fuel Eco” key.

If the “Fuel Eco History” key is selected, the average fuel consumption history will be displayed in graph form along with the average for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” later in this section.)

The fuel economy information may differ from the information displayed on the vehicle information display. This is due to the timing difference in updating the information and does not indicate a malfunction.

SAA3146

TIRE PRESSURE information

WARNING

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

The tire pressure will be displayed for reference.

The pressure indication “** kPa” or “** psi” on the screen means that the pressure is being measured. After a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will be displayed.

To change the measurement units, select the

“Select Units” key with the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.

In case of low tire pressure, LOW PRESSURE information will be displayed on the screen.

Check the pressure of all tires.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition and the temperature.

After tire rotation is performed, tire pressure will not be displayed in the actual tire position.

Drive the vehicle at over 25 MPH (40 km/h) for approximately 10 minutes to reset the display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-9

For more details about the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), see “TIRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

* When the ignition switch is in the ACC position, the “Tire Pressure” key is not displayed.

4-10

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2481

SAA2482

Maintenance information

The maintenance intervals can be displayed for the engine oil, oil filter, tire and other reminders.

To set a maintenance interval, select a preferred item from the list.

You can also set to display a message to remind you that the maintenance needs to be performed.

The following example shows how to set the engine oil maintenance information. Use the same steps to set the other maintenance information.

1. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance schedule. To determine the recommended maintenance interval, refer to your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide”.

2. To display the reminder automatically when the desired distance is reached, select the “Reminder” key.

3. Reset the driving distance to the new maintenance schedule.

4. To return to the previous screen, push the

BACK button.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” later in this section.)

SAA3003

The Reminder will be automatically displayed when the specified distance has been driven and every time the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position. The reminder will not appear while driving.

Select the “OK” key to hide the reminder for the rest of the current drive.

To stop the reminder from appearing, perform one of the following actions:

● Select the “Reset Distance”.

● Deactivate the “Reminder”.

● Increase the “Interval” distance to be more than the current distance being tracked.

SAA2483

Others information

The Others information display will appear when pushing the INFO button and selecting the

“Others” key.

GPS Position :

For the details of this item, see the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Voice Recognition :

For the details of this item, see “INFINITI VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM” later in this section.

SAA3159

HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON

The display as illustrated will appear when the

SETTING button is pushed.

For navigation settings, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-11

SAA2485-A

Audio settings

The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Audio” key.

Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade :

To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or “Fade” key and adjust it with the INFINITI controller.

These items can also be adjusted by pushing and turning the AUDIO knob.

Speed Sensitive Vol. :

The audio system’s volume is increased with the vehicle speed. Select the “Speed Sensitive

Vol.” and adjust the effect level with the INFINITI controller. The Speed Sensitive Volume function is turned off when the level is set to OFF.

Increasing the value will cause the volume to increase faster with vehicle speed.

Driver’s Audio Stage :

When this feature is turned to ON, better sound will be provided to the driver’s position. The driver can enjoy a more crisp and clear sound that is specialized for the driver’s position. The effect of this feature depends on the type of music that is played. For some music, it may be difficult to realize the effect of this feature.

DivX

Registration Code :

The registration code for a device that is used to download DivX

姞 files will be displayed on the screen. If a disc is loaded or a USB memory is connected to the audio system, this function will not be activated.

Display Album Cover Art :

When this item is turned to ON, the album cover image is displayed when playing compressed music files through a CD, DVD, iPod or MP3 USB memory. When the image is not properly embedded in the file or device, the image will not be displayed.

Phone settings

For details of the “Phone” settings, see

“Bluetooth

姞 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM” later in this section.

Bluetooth settings

For details of the “Bluetooth” settings, see

“Bluetooth

姞 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM” later in this section.

4-12

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2554

Volume and Beeps settings

The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Volume & Beeps” key.

Audio Volume :

To increase or decrease the audio volume, select the “Audio Volume” and adjust it with the

INFINITI controller. You can also adjust the audio volume by turning the VOLUME control knob.

Guidance Volume :

To adjust the guidance voice volume, select the

“Guidance Volume” and adjust it with the

INFINITI controller.

You can also adjust the guidance voice volume by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice guidance is being announced.

Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call :

For the details of these items, see “Bluetooth

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM” later in this section.

Switch Beeps :

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a beep sound when you use a button.

Guidance Voice :

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear voice guidance in the navigation operation or in other operations.

NOTE:

When the voice guidance is being announced during audio playback, turning the volume knob does not adjust the music level; it adjusts the guidance volume level. If voice guidance is not being heard, please check the Guidance Volume level.

SAA3039

REAR DISPLAY settings (if so equipped)

The “Rear Display” screen will appear when pushing the SETTING button, selecting the

“Rear Display” key with the INFINITI controller and pushing the ENTER button.

Left/Right Rear Display :

When an item is turned to ON, the selected side of the rear display turns on. (See “DUAL HEAD

RESTRAINT DVD SYSTEM” later in this section.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-13

DRIVER ASSISTANCE settings (if so equipped)

For details of the “Driver Assistance” settings, refer to the following items:

● Dynamic Assistance Settings

– “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/ PRE-

VENTION (LDP) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

– “DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYS-

TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

● Driver Assistance Warnings (if so equipped)

– “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/ PRE-

VENTION (LDP) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

– “BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

– “FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)

SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

SAA3008

Others settings

The Others settings display will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Others” key.

The following items are available:

● Display

● Comfort

● Clock

● Language & Units

● Voice Recognition

● Camera

● Image Viewer

4-14

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2486

Display settings

The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Display” key.

Display Adjustment :

To adjust the display settings, select the “Display Adjustment” key. The following settings are available.

● Display

To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other method is to push and hold the button for more than 2 seconds.

OFF

When any mode button is pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on for further operation. The screen will turn off automatically

5 seconds after the operation is finished.

To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON position, or push and hold the OFF button.

● Brightness/Contrast/Background Color

To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, select the “Brightness” or “Contrast” key.

Then, you can adjust the brightness and the contrast using the INFINITI controller.

For information on the “Background Color” key, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Color Theme :

Choose the theme color of the menu screen from “Black”, “Brown” or “Silver”.

SAA3151

Comfort settings

The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Others” key, and then selecting the “Comfort” key. This key does not appear on the display until the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

Auto Interior Illumination :

When this item is turned to ON, the interior lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked.

Light Sensitivity :

Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower (left).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-15

Light Off Delay :

Choose the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and

180 second periods.

Selective Door Unlock :

When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 60 seconds.

When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock :

When this item is turned to ON, door lock/unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch will be activated.

Lift Steering Wheel on Exit :

When this item is turned to ON, the steering wheel moves upward for easy exit if the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position.

Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit :

When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s seat moves backward for easy exit if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat moves to the previous position.

Return All Settings to Default :

Select this item and then select “YES” to return all settings to the default.

SAA2487

Clock settings

The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Clock” key.

On-screen Clock :

When this item is turned to ON, a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

4-16

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Clock Format (24h) :

When this item is turned to ON, the 24-hour clock is displayed. When this item is not turned to ON, the 12-hour clock is displayed.

Offset (hour)/(min) :

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per hour or per minute.

Daylight Saving Time :

Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time application.

Time Zone :

Choose the time zone from the following

● Pacific

● Mountain

● Central

● Eastern

● Atlantic

● Newfoundland

● Hawaii

● Alaska

SAA2490

Language & Units settings

The Language & Units settings display will appear when pushing the SETTING button.

Select the “Others” key to show the “Language

& Units” key.

Select Language :

Select the “Select Language” key. Choose “English”, “Français” or “Español” for your favorite display appearance.

If you select the “Français” key, the French language will be displayed, so please use the

French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a French

Owner’s Manual, see “OWNER’S MANUAL/ SER-

VICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9.

Technical and consumer information” section.

Select Units :

Select the “Select Units” key. Choose “US”

(Mile, °F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, °C, L/100 km) for your favorite display appearance.

Voice Recognition settings

For details about the “Voice Recognition” settings, see “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYS-

TEM” later in this section.

CAMERA settings

The “CAMERA” screen will appear when pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Camera” key with the INFINITI controller and pushing the

ENTER button.

For the details about the camera system operation, see “AROUND VIEW™ MONITOR SET-

TINGS” later in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-17

SAA2491 SAA2492

Image Viewer

Full Screen Display :

The image files in the USB memory will be displayed. To display the Image Viewer, push the SETTING button, select the “Other” key and then select the “Image Viewer” key. The image of the selected file is displayed on the right side of the screen.

When a number of folders are included in the

USB memory, select a folder from the list to display the file list.

Images will not be shown on the display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction. To view images, stop the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake.

The full screen display will appear when selecting the “Full Screen Display” key.

To operate the Image Viewer or to change the settings, select the desired key using the

INFINITI controller.

(Start)

Select the “ slideshow.

” key to start playing the

(Stop)

Select the “ show.

” key to stop the slide-

4-18

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

(Next)

Select the “ file.

” key to display the next

Select the “ ous file.

(Previous)

” key to display the previ-

Setting the Image Viewer :

The Image Viewer setting display will appear when selecting the “Settings” key on the full screen display. The following settings are available for the full screen display.

● Slideshow Speed

Select the “Slideshow Speed” key. From the following display, select the changing time from 5, 10, 30, 60 seconds or “No Auto

Change”.

● Slideshow Order

Select the “Slideshow Order” key. From the following display, select “Random” or “Order List”. For “Order List”, the image order is the order of the files as stored on the USB memory.

AROUND VIEW™ MONITOR

Operating tips :

● Only files that meet the following conditions will be displayed.

– Image type: JPEG

– File Extensions: *.jpg, *jpeg

– Maximum Resolution: 2048 × 1536 pixels

– Maximum Size: 2 MB

– Colors: 32768 (15 bit)

– Maximum File Name lengths: 253 Bytes

– Maximum Folders: 500

– Maximum Images per Folder: 1024

● If an electronic device (such as a digital camera) is directly connected to the vehicle using a USB cable, no image will be displayed on the screen.

● If the file name is too long, some file names may not be entirely displayed.

● When the total number of characters in the file name exceeds 100 or if 1 file name in a directory exceeds 100 characters, all files will show a shortened 8-character version.

The image will still be displayed when selected.

When you push the CAMERA button or shift the selector lever into the R (Reverse) position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the

Around View Monitor operates. The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle.

Available views:

● Bird-Eye View

The surrounding view of the vehicle.

● Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front passenger’s side wheel.

● Front View

The view to the front of the vehicle.

● Rearview

The view to the rear of the vehicle.

● Rear-Wide View

An approximately 180-degree view of the rear of the vehicle.

SAA3160

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.

There are some areas where the system will not detect objects. When in the front or the rearview display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be detected

. When in the bird-eye view, a tall object near the seam of the camera detecting areas will not appear in the monitor

.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-19

WARNING

The Around View Monitor is a convenience

but it is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. Always look out the windows and check to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.

Do not use the Around View Monitor with the

outside mirror in the stored position, and make sure that the lift gate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the

Around View Monitor.

The distance between objects viewed on the

Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance.

The cameras are installed above the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything on the cameras.

When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

Do not strike the cameras. They are precision

instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

NOTE:

The color of the view on the Around View Monitor display is different from the actual view because the system uses infrared cameras.

4-20

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

: Shift the selector lever

: Select the “Wide”, “Side” or “Top” key on the screen.

: Push the CAMERA button

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

The Around View Monitor display consists of the left and the right screens. You can see a combination of different views on the screens as illustrated above.

Starting with the selector lever operation

● When the selector lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position

䊊 while another screen is displayed, Around View Monitor operates and the rearview and bird-eye view

䊊 are displayed.

SAA3311

The Around View Monitor screen switches to the previous screen when the selector is shifted out of the R (Reverse) position

.

● The view on the screen on the passenger’s side switches to the front-side view the CAMERA button is pushed

CAMERA button is pushed again

. When the

CAMERA button is pushed again rear-wide view

䊊 when

, the is displayed. When the

, the view on the screen on the passenger’s side switches to the bird-eye view

.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-21

The passenger’s side screen returns to another by operating the same procedures again.

When selecting the “Wide”, “Side” or “Top” key on the screen using the INFINITI controller and pushing the ENTER button, the view on the screen will change to the one previously selected

,

,

.

● Once you have changed the view on the screen on the passenger’s side, the view on the driver’s side will change to the front view by shifting the selector lever out of the R

(Reverse) position

,

.

When the selector lever is moved to any other position than the R (Reverse) position while the rear-wide view

䊊 is displayed, another view that is set to a higher priority will be displayed

.

Starting with the CAMERA button operation

● When the CAMERA button is pushed while another screen

䊊 is displayed,

Around View Monitor operates and the front view and bird-eye view

䊊 are displayed.

● The view on the screen on the passenger’s side switches to the front-side view the CAMERA button is pushed

. When the

CAMERA button is pushed again screen

䊊 is displayed.

䊊 when

, the

● When selecting the “Side” or “Top” key on the screen using the INFINITI controller and pushing the ENTER button, the view on the screen will change to the one previously selected

.

● The left screen switches to the rearview

䊊 when the selector lever is shifted into the

,

R (Reverse) position the front view

,

, and returns to is shifted out of the R (Reverse) position ,

.

when the selector lever

● Push another button on the control panel to quit the Around View Monitor.

HOW TO SEE EACH VIEW

WARNING

The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface.

The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Use the displayed lines and the bird-eye

view as a reference. The lines and the birdeye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.

If the tires are replaced with different sized

tires, the predictive course lines and the bird-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.

When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects

viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear. Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.

The vehicle width and predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

4-22

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front view

Rearview

SAA1840

SAA1896

Front and rearview

Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line

, are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

● Red line

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

● Yellow line

● Green line

● Green line

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

:

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predictive course lines

:

Indicate the predictive course when operating the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position.

The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10 km/h).

WARNING

The distance between objects viewed in the

rearview differs from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used. Objects in the rearview will appear visually opposite than when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

On a snow-covered or slippery road, there

may be a difference between the predictive course lines and the actual course line.

If the battery is disconnected or becomes

discharged, the predictive course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, perform the following procedure:

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

When the steering wheel is turned with the

ignition switch in the ACC position, the predictive course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

The displayed lines on the rearview will ap-

pear slightly off to the right because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-23

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the neutral position, both the right and left predictive course lines

are displayed.

When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

SAA1841

Bird-eye view

The bird-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space.

The vehicle icon

䊊 shows the position of the vehicle. Note that the size of the vehicle icon on the bird-eye view may differ somewhat from the actual vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover indicated in black.

are

After pushing the ignition switch, with the

Non-viewable Area turned to ON, the nonviewable area

䊊 is highlighted in yellow for 7 seconds after the bird-eye view is displayed.

4-24

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indicator

䊊 appears.

WARNING

Objects in the bird-eye view will appear fur-

ther than the actual distance because the bird-eye view is a pseudo view that is processed by combining the views from the cameras on the outside mirrors, the front and the rear of the vehicle.

Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may

be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.

Objects that are above the camera cannot be

displayed.

The view for the bird-eye view may be mis-

aligned when the camera position alters.

A line on the ground may be misaligned and

is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.

The corner sonar indicator

䊊 will appear when a corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object.

The corner sonar indicator

䊊 can be turned off.

See “AROUND VIEW™ MONITOR SETTINGS” later in this section.

CAUTION

The turn signal light may overlap with the sideof-vehicle line. This is not a malfunction.

SAA1842

Front-side view

Guiding lines:

Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line of the vehicle.

shows the front part

The side-of-vehicle line

䊊 shows the vehicle width including the outside mirror.

The extensions

䊊 of both the front and side lines are shown with a green dotted line.

Infrared illumination:

The images on the front-side view can be displayed at night using the infrared illumination on the outside mirror.

SAA2629

Rear-wide view

The rear-wide view shows a wider area on the entire screen and allows the checking of the blind corners on the right and left sides. The rear-wide view displays an approximately 180degree area while the front view and the rearview display an approximately 150-degree area.

The predictive course lines are not displayed on the rear-wide view.

Distance guide lines:

Indicates distances from the vehicle body.

● Red line

● Yellow line

● Green line

● Green line

1

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

3

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-25

Vehicle width guide lines

:

Indicates the vehicle width when backing up.

The corner sonar indicator

䊊 will appear when a corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND

ACTUAL DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line on the front and the rearview should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

SAA3044

Moving to a steep uphill

When moving the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the

4-26

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

place

, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on the hill is the place

. Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor further than it appears.

(1.0 m) to the place

, but the actual 3 ft (1.0

m) distance on the hill is the place

. Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it appears.

SAA3045

Moving to a steep downhill

When moving the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown further than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft

SAA1923

Moving near a projecting object

The predictive course lines

䊊 do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual moving course.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-27

when moving toward the position

䊊 if the object projects over the actual moving course.

CAMERA AIDING CORNER SONAR

FUNCTION

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to the object while the Around View Monitor is displayed, an indicator is displayed and a tone is sounded by the corner sonar function to warn the driver.

The color of the corner sonar indicator and the pattern of the tone vary according to the distance to the object.

SAA3046

When the object is detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking and the volume of the tone increase. When the corner of the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

Moving closer to a projecting object

The position position tion

䊊 position

䊊 is shown further than the in the display. However, the posiis actually at the same distance as the

. The vehicle may hit the object

Keep the corner sonars (located on the front and rear bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sonars with sharp objects. If the sonars are covered, the accuracy of the corner sonar function will be diminished.

4-28

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

The corner sonar function is not designed to

prevent the object.

The colors of the corner sonar indicator and

the distance guide lines in the front/rearview indicate different distances to the object.

Inclement weather may affect the function of

the corner sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

This function is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the bum-

per fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the tone clearly.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN VIEW

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,

Color, Contrast and Black Level of the Around

View Monitor, push the SETTING button with the

Around View Monitor on, select the item key and adjust the level using the INFINITI controller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

Non-viewable Area Reminder:

With this item turned to ON, the non-viewable area is highlighted in yellow for 7 seconds after the bird-eye view is displayed.

Sonar Beep:

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a tone sound when the corner sonar indicator appears.

SAA3469

AROUND VIEW™ MONITOR SETTINGS

Sonar Display:

When this item is turned to ON, the corner sonar indicator is displayed in the front-side view.

Corner Sonar Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity level of the corner sonar higher (right) or lower (left).

To set up the Around View Monitor to your preferred settings, push the SETTING button, select the “Camera” key and push the ENTER button.

Predictive Course Lines:

When this item is turned to ON, the predictive course lines is displayed in the front and the rearview.

Camera View Priority:

The view shown on the screen at the beginning of around view monitor operation can be selected in order of priority.

OPERATING TIPS

● The screen displayed on the Around View

Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pushed while the selector lever is in a position other than the R

(Reverse) position.

● The display of images on the screen may be delayed after screens are switched. Objects in the Around View Monitor may be distorted momentarily until the Around View Monitor screen is displayed completely.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-29

VENTILATORS

● When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.

● When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.

● The colors of objects on the Around View

Monitor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark location or at night. This is not a malfunction.

● There may be differences in clearness between each camera view of the bird-eye view.

● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the Around View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.

● Do not damage the camera because the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

● Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a mild detergent diluted with water.

4-30

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Center ventilators

SAA3053

Open/close the ventilators by moving the control to either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are closed. Moving the side control to this direction will close the ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are open. Moving the side control to this direction will open the ventilators.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob (up/down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Side ventilators

SAA3054

Open/close the ventilators by moving the control to either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are closed. Moving the side control to this direction will close the ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are open. Moving the side control to this direction will open the ventilators.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob (up/down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved.

Rear ventilators

SAA3055

WARNING

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Do not leave children or adults who would

normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Do not use the recirculation mode for long

periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Do not adjust the heating and air condition-

ing controls while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Open/close the ventilators by moving the control to either direction.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob (up/down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved.

Start the engine and operate the automatic climate control system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-31

SAA2723

When the STATUS button is pushed, the automatic climate control status screen will appear.

(See “HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON” earlier in this section.)

4-32

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Without Advanced Climate Control System (ACCS)

SAA3059

1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON button/Temperature control dial (driver side)

2. “ ” front defroster button

3. “ ” rear window defroster button

(See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIR-

ROR DEFROSTER / WINDSHIELD DEICER

SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

4. “ ” fan speed decrease button

5. “OFF” button for climate control system

6. “ ” fan speed increase button

7. “

8. “

” intake air control button

” air recirculation button

9. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button/

Temperature control dial (passenger side)

10. “MODE” manual air flow control button

11. “REAR” control button

12. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

13. “ ” upper vent button

14. “ ” auto-recirculation button

With Advanced Climate Control System (ACCS)

SAA3161

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-33

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO) :

This mode may be used all year round. The system works automatically to control the inside temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed after the preferred temperature is set manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator on the button will illuminate and AUTO will be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial (driver side) to set the desired temperature.

● The temperature can be set within the following range.

– For U.S.: 60 to 90°F

– For Canada: 18 to 32°C

● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed will also be controlled automatically.

3. You can individually set driver and front passenger side temperature using each temperature control button. When the

“DUAL” button is pushed or the passenger side temperature control button is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on.

To turn off the passenger side temperature control, push the “DUAL” button.

4. To turn off the climate control system, push the “OFF” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Heating (A/C OFF) :

The air conditioner does not activate in this mode. When you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on.

2. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator will turn off.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

4-34

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly.

● Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:

1. Push the “ ” front defroster button.

(The indicator light on the button will illuminate.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, push the fan speed increase button “ ” and set it to the maximum position.

● As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to the auto mode.

● When the “

” front defroster button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23°F (

⫺5°C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

Manual operation

Fan speed control :

Push the fan speed increase “ crease “

” or de-

” buttons to manually control the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air flow control :

Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side ventilators.

: Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

Air recirculation :

Push the intake air control button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the “ ” button will illuminate.

The air recirculation mode cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode “ ”.

Outside air circulation :

Push the intake air control button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment.

The indicator light on the “ turn off and “

” button will

” (if so equipped) will illuminate.

Automatic intake air control :

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. To manually control the intake air, push the intake air control button.

● Without Advanced Climate Control System

(ACCS):

To return to the automatic control mode, push the intake air control button for about

2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air recirculation “ ” and outside air circulation “ ” buttons) will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically.

● With Advanced Climate Control System

(ACCS):

To return to the automatic control mode, push the intake air control button until the indicator light on the “ ” button illuminates. The Advanced Climate Control System

(ACCS) turns on and the intake air will be controlled automatically.

To turn the system off :

Push the “OFF” button.

Advanced Climate Control System

(ACCS) (if so equipped)

The Advanced Climate Control System (ACCS) keeps the air inside of the vehicle clean, using the ion control and the automatic air intake control with exhaust gas detecting sensor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-35

SAA2734

Ion control :

This unit generates highly concentrated Plasmacluster ions into the air blown from the ventilators and reduces odor absorbed into the interior trim.

When the air conditioner is turned on, the system generates Plasmacluster ions automatically.

The amount of Plasmacluster ions increases according to the amount of air flow. When the air flow is high, “ ” is displayed on the screen and when the air flow is low, the indication in the screen changes to “ ”.

Plasmacluster and Plasmacluster ion are registered trademarks of Sharp Corporation.

Exhaust gas/outside odor detection sensor :

This vehicle is equipped with an exhaust gas detection sensor. When the automatic intake air control is ON, the sensor detects industry odors such as pulp or chemicals, and exhaust gas such as gasoline or diesel. When such odors or gas are detected, the system automatically changes from the outside air circulation mode to the recirculation mode.

When the intake air control button is pushed under the following conditions, the indicator light on the “ ” button will illuminate and the exhaust gas detection sensor will turn on.

● The air flow control is not in the front defroster mode (the indicator light on the

“ ” front defroster button is turned off).

● The outside temperature is about 32°F (0°C) or more.

When the automatic intake air control is ON, for the first 5 minutes, the recirculation mode is selected to prevent dust, dirt and pollen from entering the vehicle and cleans the air inside of the vehicle with positive and negative ions that are emitted from the ventilator.

After the 5 minutes, the sensor detects exhaust gas and automatically alternates between the recirculation mode and outside air circulation mode.

4-36

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA3157

Rear automatic air conditioning system

To control the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner control panel, push the “REAR” button. When the rear automatic air conditioning system control is on, the indicator light on the “REAR” button will illuminate and the front display will switch to the rear air conditioner screen.

The rear automatic air conditioning system can be adjusted with the front air conditioner control panel, when the rear air conditioner screen is displayed.

To adjust the front air conditioning system, push the “REAR” button one more time.

Automatic operation:

1. Push the “AUTO” button. (The AUTO indicator light will illuminate and “AUTO” will appear on the display.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial (driver’s side) to set the desired temperature.

Manual operation :

Temperature control

Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

Fan speed control

Push the fan speed control “ or “

” button

” button to manually control the fan speed.

Air flow control

Push the “MODE” button to change the air flow mode.

: The air outlet is fixed at foot level.

: The air outlet is fixed at both the head and foot level.

: The air outlet is fixed at the head level.

Pushing the “A/C” button when the rear automatic air conditioning system is turned on with the rear air conditioner screen displayed will also turn off the rear automatic air conditioning system.

Rear Heating (A/C off):

1. Push the “REAR” button to display the rear air conditioner screen on the front display when the rear automatic air conditioning system is on.

2. Switch the air flow mode to pushing the “MODE” button.

by

3. Push the “AUTO” button. (The AUTO indicator light will illuminate and “AUTO” will appear on the display.)

4. If the A/C indicator light illuminates, push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator light will turn off.)

5. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

● Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Doing so may cause the temperature to not be controlled properly.

● To dehumidify the air, push the “A/C” button before turning on the heater.

● Air does not blow out from the vents on the ceiling when the system is used for heating.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-37

Turning the system off :

Push the OFF button when the rear air conditioner screen is displayed.

1. “OFF” button

2. Fan speed control button

3. “AUTO” button

4. Display

4-38

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA3327

5. “MODE” button

6. “TEMP” button

Rear control buttons:

The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear automatic air conditioning system using the control switches at the rear of the center console.

The rear control buttons do not function when the rear air conditioner screen is shown on the front display. To activate the rear control buttons, push the “REAR” button on the front air conditioner control panel and switch the screen on the front display.

“OFF” button: Rear automatic air conditioning system off.

“ ” button: Rear fan speed control up/down

“AUTO” button: Rear automatic air conditioning system on, AUTO mode on

“MODE” button: Rear air flow control change

“TEMP” button: Rear temperature control up/down

SAA3088

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

The sensors

䊊 and

䊊 located on the instrument panel help maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around the sensors.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

Models without Advanced Climate Control System:

The climate control system is equipped with an in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide. To replace the filter, contact an

INFINITI retailer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow is extremely decreased or when windows fog up easily when operating heater or air conditioning system.

Models with Advanced Climate Control System:

The climate control system is equipped with a natural grape seed polyphenol filter which collects and neutralizes dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure that the air conditioner heats, defogs and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide. To replace the filter, contact an INFINITI retailer.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow decreases significantly or if windows fog up easily when operating the heater or air conditioner.

SAA3058

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-39

AUDIO SYSTEM

SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL

The climate control system in your INFINITI is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant will not

harm the earth’s ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your INFINITI air conditioner.

Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your climate control system. (See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for climate control system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.)

Your INFINITI retailer will be able to service your environmentally friendly climate control system.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with the proper equipment.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position and push the radio band select button to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition switch should be pushed to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception :

Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your INFINITI radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception.

Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

4-40

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA0306

FM radio reception :

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single station) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the

FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position, usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the treble setting to reduce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception :

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics. AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Satellite radio reception :

When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for the satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

The satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-41

SAA0480

Compact Disc (CD) player

● Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or

CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.

● The player may skip while driving on rough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL

AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

● CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work properly:

– Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

– Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction.

– 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

– CDs that are not round

– CDs with a paper label

– CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play prerecorded

CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn

CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

– Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly

(the label side is facing up, etc.).

– Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches.

4-42

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the temperature inside the player is too high. Remove the CD by pushing the EJECT button, and after a short time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio system (only

AAC, MP3 and WMA CD).

LHA0484

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player

● Do not force a compact disc into the CD/DVD insert slot. This could damage the CD/DVD player.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.

● The player may skip while driving on rough roads.

● The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL

AUDIO” or “DVD Video” logo on the disc or packaging.

● Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct sunlight.

● CD/DVDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pinholes may not work properly.

● The following CD/DVDs are not guaranteed to play:

– Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

– Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

– Recordable DVDs (DVD±R, DVD±R DL)

– Rewritable DVDs (DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-43

● Do not use the following CD/DVDs as they may cause the CD/DVD player to malfunction.

– 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

– CD/DVDs that are not round

– CD/DVDs with a paper label

– CD/DVDs that are warped, scratched or have abnormal edges

– This audio system can only play prerecorded CD/DVDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn CD/DVDs.

● If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed.

Disc Read Error:

– Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up, etc.).

– Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches.

Please Eject Disc:

– This may be an error due to the temperature inside the player being too high.

Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the EJECT button, and after a short time reinsert the

CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal. If the error persists, consult your local retailership.

Unplayable File:

– The file may be copy protected.

– The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A or

DivX

姞 type.

Region Invalid:

– The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions.

Use DVDs with a region code “1”, “ALL” or

“1 included” for your DVD entertainment system. (The region code

䊊 is displayed as a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD

.) This vehicle-installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a region code other than “1” or “ALL”.

Copyright and trademark :

● The technology protected by the U.S. patent and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other right holders is adopted for this system.

● This copyright protected technology cannot be used without a permit from Macrovision

Corporation. It is limited to be personal use, etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision

Corporation is not issued.

● Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.

● Dolby digital is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

● Dolby and the double D mark “ trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

” are

● DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.

and DTS 2.0 “ ” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Parental level (parental control) :

DVDs with the parental control setting can be played with this system. Please use your own judgement to set the parental control with the system.

4-44

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Disc selection :

The following disc formats can be played with the DVD drive.

● DVD-VIDEO

● DVD-AUDIO*

● VIDEO-CD

● CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc)

● DTS-CD

* DVD-AUDIO may not be playable depending on the system.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

This system supports various USB memory sticks, USB hard drives and iPod

姞 players.

There are some USB devices which may not be supported with this system.

● Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connector.

● Do not force the memory stick or USB cable into the USB connector. This could damage the connector.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to humidity. If this occurs, remove the USB device and dehumidify or ventilate the USB player completely.

● The USB player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.

● Do not leave USB memory in a place prone to static electricity or where the air conditioner blows directly. The data in the USB memory may be damaged.

● The vehicle is not equipped with a USB memory stick.

● A USB device cannot be formatted with this system. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.

● Partitioned USB devices may not be played correctly.

● Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen. Using

English language characters with a USB device is recommended.

● Do not connect a USB device if a connector or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or connectors to dry completely before connecting the USB device. If the connector is exposed to fluids other than water, evaporative residue may cause a short between the connector pins.

● Large video podcast files cause slow responses in an iPod

姞. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.

● If an iPod姞 automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.

● Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod

姞.

● An iPod nano姞 (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod

姞.

● An iPod nano姞 (2nd Generation) will continue to fast forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.

● An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using the iPod nano

姞 (2nd Generation) iPod

姞 is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-45

Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/

AAC)

Explanation of terms :

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1

kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. The compression reduces certain parts of sound that seem inaudible to most people.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

● AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is a lossy audio compression format. Audio files that have been encoded with AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver a higher quality of sound than MP3.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows

姞 and Windows Media姞 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States of America and/or other countries.

4-46

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2494

Playback order :

● The folder names of folders not containing compressed audio files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of a disc/USB,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.

● Music playback order of compressed audio files is as illustrated in the previous figure.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-47

Specification chart:

Supported media

Supported file systems

Supported versions*1

MP3

WMA*2

AAC

Version

Sampling frequency

Bit rate

Version

Sampling frequency

Bit rate

Version

Sampling frequency

Bit rate

Tag information (Song title and Artist name)

Folder levels

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, USB2.0

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo,

Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0

* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

MPEG1 Audio Layer 3

8 kHz - 48 kHz

8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

32 kHz - 48 kHz

32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR (Ver.9)*4

MPEG-AAC

8 kHz - 96 kHz

16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

4-48

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Text character number limitation 100 characters

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big

Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-49

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Cannot play

Poor sound quality

It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)”, “.M4A (.m4a)”, or “.AA3 (.aa3)” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song when playing.

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.

4-50

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Symptom

The songs do not play back in the desired order.

Cause and Countermeasure

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.

Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-51

Compressed Video Files

Explanation of terms :

● DivX姞 - DivX姞 refers to the DivX姞 codec owned by DivX, Inc. used for a lossy compression of video based on MPEG-4.

● AVI - AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave. It is a standard file format originated by Microsoft Corporation. A “.divx” encoded file can be saved into the “.avi” file format for playback on this system if it meets the requirements stated in the table in this section.

However, not all the “.avi” files are playable on this system since different encodings can be used than the DivX

姞 codec.

● ASF - ASF stands for Advanced Systems

Format. It is a file format owned by Microsoft

Corporation. Note: Only “.asf” files that meet the requirements stated in the table in this section can be played.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital video file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.

Requirement for Supporting Video Playback:

Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory

File Systems

File Types

CD,

CD-R,

CD-RW,

DVD,

DVD±R,

DVD±RW,

DVD±RW DL

USB Memory

.divx, .avi

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge

(UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0

- ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

- Files saved using the Live File System component (on a

Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.

- VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

FAT16, FAT32

Video Codecs

Audio Codecs

DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6

MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3,

LPCM

.asf

Bit Rates .divx, .avi

Video Codec

Audio Codec

Maximum Average

ISO-MPEG4

G.726

4Mbps

Resolution .divx, .avi

.asf

Maximum Peak

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

8Mbps

32 × 32

720 × 480

32 × 32

720 × 576

4-52

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Bluetooth streaming audio

● Some Bluetooth姞 audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

● It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth

姞 audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth

姞 module before using the Bluetooth streaming audio.

● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth streaming audio will vary depending on the device. Make sure it is understood how to operate an audio device before using it with this system.

● The Bluetooth streaming audio may be stopped under the following conditions:

– Receiving a hands-free call.

– Checking the connection to the handsfree phone.

● Do not place a Bluetooth姞 audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth

姞 module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

● While an audio device is connected through a Bluetooth

姞 wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual.

● This system supports the Bluetooth姞 Audio

Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

● Bluetooth姞 is a trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to

Clarion Co., Ltd.

Music Box

Recording :

● Note that data that is lost and not stored to the in-vehicle memory due to system damage, improper operation or malfunction is not under warranty.

● Vehicle owners are not permitted to record music without permission of the owner of the copyright except for personal use.

● Check if the music is appropriately recorded to the in-vehicle memory after recording when the compact disc cannot be rerecorded.

● Some music cannot be recorded depending on the disc condition due to high-speed recording.

● Jumping sounds may be recorded when a compact disc is recorded while driving on rough roads and excessive vibration occurs.

● A mark indicating jumping sounds is displayed if jumping sounds are recorded.

● No sounds may be recorded if jumping sounds occurs or the disc is in poor condition.

● Tracks that include Serial Copy Management

System (SCMS) are not recorded.

● If a compact disc is scratched or dirty, it may not be recorded, jumping sounds may occur or it may take a long time to record.

Automatic title download :

● The title information that is automatically downloaded may differ from the actual title.

● When newly released compact discs are recorded, their title information may not be downloaded.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-53

SAA3155

1. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

2. DISC·AUX button

3. FM·AM band select button

4. XM band select button

5. SCAN button

6. FF (forward)/REW (rewind) or SEEK/TRACK button

7. RDM (random)·RPT (repeat) play button

8. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA/AAC folder selector / AUDIO control knob

4-54

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. CD EJECT button

10. CD/DVD slot

11. Radio station preset buttons

No satellite radio reception is available unless an XM Satellite Radio subscription is active.

The audio control buttons are also located on the center multi-function control panel.

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO OP-

ERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this section.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activation signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio.

After receiving the activation signal, an available channel list will be automatically updated in the radio. For XM, push the ignition switch from LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.

Audio main operation

Head unit :

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and high frequency ranges automatically in both radio reception and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control :

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, and then push the ON·OFF button while the system is off to turn on the last audio source (i.e. FM or CD), which was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance :

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push the Audio control knob. When the display shows the setting you want to change (Bass,

Treble, Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control knob to set the desired setting. For the other setting methods, see “HOW TO USE SET-

TING BUTTON” earlier in this section.

This vehicle has some sound effect functions as follows:

● Speed Sensitive Vol.

● Driver’s Audio Stage

For more details, see “VEHICLE INFORMATION

AND SETTINGS” earlier in this section.

Switching the display :

Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch the displays as follows: iPod

姞/USB → CD/DVD → Music Box姞 →

Bluetooth

姞 streaming audio → AUX → iPod

姞/USB

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

When the radio band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the channel last played.

The last channel played will also come on when the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.

If another audio source is playing when the radio band select button is turned to ON, the audio source will automatically be turned off and the last radio channel played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

radio (FM·AM) band select :

Pushing the FM·AM radio band select button will change the band as follows:

AM

→ FM1 → FM2 → AM

radio (XM) band select :

Pushing the XM radio band select button will change the band as follows:

XM1

→ XM2 → XM3 → XM1

The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

TUNE (Tuning) :

● For AM and FM radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual tuning.

● For XM Satellite Radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek channels from all of the categories when any category is not selected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-55

SEEK tuning :

● For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK or TRACK button or to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

● For XM Satellite Radio

Push the SEEK or TRACK button or to tune to the first channel of the next or previous category.

During satellite radio reception, the following notices will be displayed under certain conditions.

● NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the

SAT tuner is connected.)

● OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

● CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection error)

● LOADING (When the initial setting is performed)

● UPDATING (When the satellite radio subscription is not active)

● INVALID CH (Invalid channel is received.)

SCAN tuning :

button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station/channel.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within

5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station/channel.

to Station memory operations :

12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band

(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for XM radio (6 each for XM1, XM2 and XM3) and 6 stations can be set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the radio band select button.

2. Tune to the desired station/channel using the SEEK, TRACK, SCAN button or the radio TUNE knob.

3. Push and hold the desired station preset button

䊊 to until the radio mutes.

4. The station indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing the

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that case, reset the desired stations/channels.

4-56

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu (XM Satellite Radio) :

When the “Menu” key on the display is selected while the XM Satellite Radio is being played, the menu list will be displayed.

The following items are available.

● Preset List

Displays the preset channel list. If 1 of the 6 preset stations listed is touched and held, the current station will be stored as the new preset.

● Customize Channel List

Selects specific channels to skip while using the TUNE, SEEK/CATEGORY or Menu-

Categories feature.

● Favorite Artists & Songs

Stores the current artist or song that is being played. Touch the “Alert” key to be reminded when the stored artist or song is playing on a station while listening to XM.

● Categories

Selecting a category will go to the first channel in that category as defined by XM

Radio.

● Direct Tune

Inputs the channel number by using a keypad.

Compact Disc (CD) player operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing.

After loading the CD, the number of tracks on the CD and the play time will appear on the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the CD was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will start the CD.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

PLAY :

When the DISC·AUX (CD play) button is pushed with the system off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on and the CD will start to play.

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the

CD loaded and the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the CD will start to play.

Menu :

When the “Menu” key on the display is selected while the CD is being played, the menu screen will be displayed. The following menu options are available.

● Folder List (for CD with compressed audio files)

Displays the folder list.

● Track List

Displays the track list.

● Play Mode

Select a play mode from the following items.

– Normal

– 1 Folder Repeat (for CD with compressed audio files)

– 1 Track Repeat

– 1 Disc Random

– 1 Folder Random (for CD with compressed audio files)

● Record to Music Box姞 (for CD)

Select to choose specific songs on the CD to record to the Music Box

姞.

● Title Text Priority (for CD)

Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc Data

Base) to acquire track information from the

Gracenote Database, or set the priority to

CD-TEXT to acquire the information from CD.

● Automatic Recording (for CD)

When this item is turned to ON, the Music

Box

姞 automatically starts recording when a

CD is inserted.

● Recording Quality (for CD)

The larger number (132) will increase the recorded sound quality while taking up more space on the Music Box

姞 leaving less room for more songs.

For the details of Music Box

姞, see “MUSIC

BOX

姞” later in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-57

Next/Previous Track and

Fast Forward/Rewind :

When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CD will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the CD will be played.

When the rewind button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current track starts playing, the previous track will be played.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM) :

When the button is pushed while the CD is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

(CD)

(CD with compressed audio files)

CD EJECT :

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will be ejected.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it.

DVD (DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC)

PLAYER OPERATION

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertainment system.

Movies will not be shown on the front display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie is played. To view movies in the front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

4-58

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the

DVD system or wear the headphones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Do not attempt to modify the system to dis-

play a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is being driven. Doing so may distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death.

CAUTION

Only operate the DVD while the vehicle en-

gine is running. Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery.

Do not allow the system to get wet. Exces-

sive moisture such as spilled liquids may cause the system to malfunction.

While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD

player does not guarantee complete functionality of all VIDEO-CD formats.

SAA2497

Playing a DVD

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while watching the images.

Inserting/removing Disk :

Insert a DVD into the CD/DVD slot with the labeled side up. The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot. When ejecting the DVD, push the EJECT button.

DISC·AUX button :

When a DVD is loaded, it will begin playing automatically.

The operation screen will be turned on when the

DISC·AUX button located on the instrument panel is pushed while a DVD is being played, and it will turn off automatically after a period of time. To turn it on again, push the DISC·AUX button again.

DVD operation keys :

When the DVD is playing without the operation screen being shown as illustrated, you may use the touch screen to select items from the displayed video. You may also use the INFINITI controller to select an item from the displayed video. When the operation screen is being shown, use the INFINITI controller or touch screen to select an item from the displayed menus.

PAUSE:

Select the “ ” key to pause the DVD. To resume playing the DVD, use the “PLAY” key.

PLAY:

Select the “ ” key to start playing the DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD.

STOP:

Select the “

/

” key to stop playing the DVD.

Next/Previous Chapter:

Select the “ ” or “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward/backward. The chapters will advance/go back the number of times this key is selected.

/ Commercial Skip:

This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR.

Select the “ ” or “ ” key to skip forward or backwards by the set amount as defined in the DVD Settings menu.

/ Next/Previous Image:

This function is only for DVD-AUDIO. Select the

“ ” or “ ” key to advance or rewind the still image. The still image will advance or rewind the number of times this key is selected.

Top Menu :

When the “Top Menu” key is selected in the screen while a DVD is being played, the top menu specific to each disc will be displayed. For details, see the instructions on the disc.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-59

Hide: Hide the operation key.

Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO) :

Some menus specific to each disc will be shown. For details, see the instructions on the disc.

DVD settings

Example

SAA2498

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following settings.

Key (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO) :

Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed.

: Move the cursor to select a DVD menu.

Enter: Enter the selected menu.

Move: Change the display location by moving the operation key.

Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR) :

The scene with the specified title will be displayed each time the “+” side or “

⫺” side is selected.

Group Search (DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO CD) :

A scene in the specified group will be displayed each time the “+” side or “

⫺” side is selected.

10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,CD-DA,

DVD-VR) :

Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the number entry screen. Input the number to be searched and select the “OK” key. The specified

Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.

Select No. (VIDEO-CD) :

Select the “Select No.” key to open the number entry screen. Input the number to be searched and select the “OK” key. The specified scene will be played.

Back: Return to the previous screen.

4-60

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Angle (DVD-VIDEO) :

If the DVD contains different angles (such as moving images), the current image angle can be switched to another one. Select the “Angle” key. The angle will change each time the “+” side or “

⫺” side is selected.

Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO) :

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a different angle.

Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO) :

DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the

“Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on.

CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO) :

Select the “CM Skip” key. Choose the setting time from 15, 30 or 60 seconds by selecting the

“+” side or “

⫺” side.

DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR) :

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) automatically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers.

DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD) :

Select the “DVD Language” key to open the number entry screen. Input the number corresponding to the preferred language and select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one specified.

Display :

To adjust the image quality of the screen, select the preferred adjustment items.

Audio :

Select the preferred language for audio.

Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR) :

Select the preferred language for subtitles.

Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, DVD-VR) :

Select from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or

“Cinema” modes.

Title List (DVD-VR) :

Select the preferred title from the list.

Play Mode :

Select the preferred play mode.

PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR) :

Select the “PG” or “PL” mode.

Display settings

To adjust the front display mode, push the

SETTING button while the DVD is being played, select the “Others” key and then select the

“Display” key.

To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint, color and contrast, select the “Display Adjustment” key and then select each key.

Then you can adjust each item using the

INFINITI controller. After changes have been made push the BACK button to save the setting.

SAA3260

USB MEMORY OPERATION

Audio main operation

Open the tray lid and connect a USB memory

䊊 as illustrated. Then, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly to switch to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the USB memory.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-61

Playable files

Only files that meet the following conditions are playable.

Music files:

● File format: MP3 (“.mp3), WMA (“.wma”),

AAC (“.aac”), M4A (“.m4a”)

● File size: 2 gigabytes or less

Video files:

● File format DivX (“.divx”), MPEG4 (ASF)

(“.afs”, “.avi”)

● File size: 2 gigabytes or less

SAA2500

File selection

When there are both audio and movie files in the USB memory, the mode select screen is displayed. Select the preferred contents to play.

When there is only one type of file, the audio or movie operation screen is displayed and starts to play.

If a video file restricts the number of playbacks, a pop-up screen will appear to confirm it is ok to play. Answer yes or no as requested by the display.

SAA2501

Audio file operation

PLAY :

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory inserted, the system will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a USB memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode.

4-62

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Next/Previous File and Fast

Forward/Rewind :

When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while a USB memory is being played, the USB memory will play while forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the USB memory will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the USB memory is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the USB memory will be played.

When the rewind button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current track starts playing, the previous track will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to select tracks when the USB memory is being played.

Folder selection :

To change to another folder in the USB memory, turn the folder selector or choose a folder displayed on the screen using the INFINITI controller.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM) :

When the button is pushed while the

USB memory is played, the play pattern can be change as follows.

To change the play mode, push the button repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.

Normal

→ 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat →

All Random

→ 1 Folder Random → Normal

SAA2502

Menu :

There are some options available during playback. Select one of the following options that are displayed on the screen if necessary. Refer to the following information for each item.

Movie Playback

Switch to the movie playback mode. This item is displayed only when a USB memory contains movie files.

Folder List/Track List

Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie

Playback” key is also displayed in this list screen, and enables switching to the movie playback mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-63

Play Mode

Select the preferred play mode.

SAA2503

Movie file operation

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the USB memory while watching the images.

PLAY :

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory inserted, the system will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a USB memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode.

Operation keys :

To operate the USB memory, select the desired key displayed on the operation screen using the

INFINITI controller.

Pause

Select the “ ” key to pause the movie file.

To resume playing the movie file, select the

“ ” key.

Play

Select the “ ” key to start playing a movie file, for example, after pausing a movie file.

STOP

Select the “ file.

” key to stop playing a movie

Skip (Next chapter)

Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward. The chapters will advance the number of times the ENTER button is pushed.

4-64

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Skip (Previous chapter)

Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters will go back the number of times the “ lected.

” key is se-

List :

Select the “List” key on the movie file operation screen to display the file list.

Example

SAA2504

Settings :

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following settings.

Audio File Playback

Switch to the audio playback mode. This item is displayed only when the USB memory contains the audio files.

Play Mode

Select the “Normal” or “1 Track Repeat” play mode.

10 Key Search

Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the number entry screen.

Input the number to be searched and select the “OK” key.

The specified folder/file will be played.

Display

To adjust the image quality of the screen, select the preferred adjustment items.

DRC

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) automatically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers.

Audio

Select the preferred language for audio.

Subtitle

Select the preferred language for subtitle.

Display Mode

Select the “Normal”, “Wide”, “Cinema” or

“Full” mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-65

BLUETOOTH

姞 STREAMING AUDIO

Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth

Streaming Audio. If you have a compatible

Bluetooth

姞 device with streaming audio (A2DP profile), you can set up the wireless connection between your Bluetooth

姞 device and the invehicle audio system. This connection allows you to listen to the audio from the Bluetooth

姞 device using your vehicle speakers. It also may allow basic control of the device for playing and skipping audio files using the AVRCP Bluetooth profile. All Bluetooth

姞 Devices do not have the same level of controls for AVRCP. Please consult the manual for your Bluetooth

姞 Device for more details.

Once your Bluetooth

姞 device is connected to the in-vehicle audio system, it will automatically reconnect whenever the device is present in the vehicle and you select Bluetooth Audio from your audio system. You do not need to manually reconnect for each usage.

Regulatory information

FCC Regulatory information :

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s

RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) This device may not cause interference and

2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information :

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) This device may not cause interference, and

2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth

姞 is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to

Clarion Co., Ltd.

4-66

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2505

Connecting procedure

1. Push the SETTING button and select the

“Bluetooth” key.

SAA2506

2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

SAA2507

3. A confirmation screen will be displayed.

Select “No”.

Note: Selecting “Yes” will only connect the hands free phone portion of a Bluetooth

姞 device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-67

SAA3005

4. When a passkey appears on the screen, operate the compatible Bluetooth

姞 audio device to enter the passkey. The pairing procedure of the audio device varies according to each audio device. See the

Bluetooth

姞 audio Owner’s Manual for details.

When pairing is completed, the screen will return to the Bluetooth

姞 setup display.

SAA2510

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly to switch to the Bluetooth audio mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

Bluetooth audio device was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the

Bluetooth audio device.

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward, rewind, randomize and repeat music may be different between devices. Some or all of these functions may not be supported on each device.

DISC·AUX button :

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the system off and the Bluetooth audio device connected, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the Bluetooth

姞 audio device is connected, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the display changes to the Bluetooth audio mode.

Next/Previous Track and

Fast Forward/Rewind :

When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth

姞 audio file is being played, the Bluetooth

姞 audio device will play while forwarding or rewinding.

When the button is released, the Bluetooth

姞 audio device will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth

姞 audio file is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the Bluetooth audio device will be played.

When the rewind button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current track starts playing, the previous track will be played.

4-68

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The INFINITI controller can also be used to select tracks when the Bluetooth

姞 audio play mode screen is shown on the display.

(“Bluetooth audio” will be indicated on the header of the screen.)

Play pattern change :

To change the play mode, push the button repeatedly and the mode changes as follows.

Normal

→ Shuffle All Tracks → Repeat 1 Track

→ Repeat All Tracks → Normal

Operation keys :

To operate a Bluetooth

姞 audio device, select a key displayed on the operation screen using the

INFINITI controller.

Play

Select the “ ” key to start playing when pausing. Select this key again to pause the audio play.

Pause

Select the “ ” key to pause the

Bluetooth

姞 audio device. Select this key again to resume playing.

Play Mode :

The play mode setting display will appear when the “Menu” key is selected.

Choose the preferred play mode from the following items.

Shuffle

Choose “Shuffle OFF” and “Shuffle All

Tracks”.

Repeat

Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1 Track” and “Repeat All Tracks”.

SAA2511

Bluetooth

姞 settings

To set up the Bluetooth device system to the preferred settings, push the SETTING button and select the “Bluetooth” key.

Bluetooth :

If this setting is turned off, the connection between the Bluetooth devices and the invehicle Bluetooth module will be canceled.

Connect Bluetooth :

Connects to the Bluetooth device. See “Connecting procedure” earlier in this section. Up to

5 devices can be registered.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-69

Connected Devices :

Registered devices are shown on the list. Select a Bluetooth device from the list, the following options will be available.

Select

Select “Select” to connect the selected device to the vehicle. If there is a different device currently connected, the selected device will replace the current device.

Edit

Rename the selected Bluetooth device using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See

“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in this section.)

Delete

Delete the selected Bluetooth device.

Edit Bluetooth Info :

Change the name broadcasted by this system over Bluetooth. Change the PIN code that is entered when connecting a hands free device to this system.

Replace Connected Phone :

Replace the Bluetooth connection with a connected Bluetooth cellular phone. For details about Hands-Free Phone System, see

“Bluetooth

姞 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM” later in this section.

SAA3261

IPOD

姞 PLAYER OPERATION

Connecting iPod

Open the tray lid and connect the iPod

姞 cable to the USB connector. If the iPod

姞 supports charging via USB, the battery of the iPod

姞 will be charged while connected to the vehicle.

Depending on the version of the iPod

姞, the display on the iPod

姞 shows an INFINITI or

Accessory Attached screen when the connection is completed. When the iPod

姞 is connected to the vehicle, the iPod

姞 music library can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

* iPod

姞 is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

4-70

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compatibility

The following models are available:

● Fifth generation iPod姞 (version 1.2.3 or later)

● iPod Classic (version 1.1.1 or later)

● First generation iPod touch姞 (version 2.0.0

or later)

● Second generation iPod touch姞 (version

1.2.3 or later)

● First generation iPod nano (version 1.3.1 or later)

● Second generation iPod nano姞 (version 1.1.3

or later)

● Third generation iPod nano姞 (version 1.1 or later)

● Fourth generation iPod nano姞 (version 1.0.2

or later)

This unit may not control/operate correctly when connected to some iPod versions/ firmware and iPhone.

Make sure that the iPod

姞 version is updated.

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod

姞 mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod

姞 was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will start the iPod

姞.

PLAY :

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the system off and the iPod

姞 connected, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod

姞 is connected, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod

姞 mode.

Interface :

The interface for iPod

姞 operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod

姞 interface. Use the INFINITI controller and the

ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod

姞 with your favorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen. For further information about each item, see the iPod

姞 Owner’s Manual.

● Now Playing

● Playlists

● Artists

● Albums

● Songs

● Podcasts

● Genres

● Composers

● Audiobooks

● Shuffle Songs

The following touch-panel buttons shown on the screen are also available:

: returns to the previous screen.

: plays/pauses the music selected.

Next/Previous Track and

Fast Forward/Rewind :

When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod

姞 is playing, the iPod

姞 will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the iPod

姞 will return to the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod

姞 is playing, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod

姞 will be played.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-71

When the rewind button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current track starts playing, the previous track will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to select tracks when the iPod

姞 is playing.

Play pattern change :

When the button is pushed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

MUSIC BOX

The Music Box

姞 audio system can store songs from CD being played. The system has a 9.3

gigabyte (GB) storage capacity.

The following CDs can be recorded in the Music

Box

姞 audio system.

● CDs that contain uncompressed audio files

● Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid

CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs

● Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) specification in CD-Extras

● First session of multisession disc

Extreme temperature conditions [below

4°F

(

20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect the

performance of the hard-disk.

NOTE:

If the audio system needs to be replaced due to a malfunction, all stored music data will be erased.

SAA2513

Recording CD

1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For the details of playing a CD, see “Compact

Disc (CD) player operation” earlier in this section.

2. Select the “Start REC” key.

NOTE:

The system starts playing and recording the

1st track on the CD when the “Start REC” key is selected.

The recording process can be stopped at any

time. All tracks that were played before the

CD was stopped are stored.

4-72

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Individual tracks can be deleted from the

hard disk drive after the CD is recorded.

SAA2514

If the title information of the track being recorded is stored either in the in-vehicle memory or in the CD, the title is automatically displayed on the screen. For title acquisition from the in-vehicle memory, music recognition technology and related data are provided by

Gracenote

姞.

If a track is not recorded successfully due to skipping sounds, the mark is displayed behind the track number.

The Music Box

姞 cannot perform recording under the following conditions.

● There is not enough space in-vehicle memory

● The number of albums reaches the maximum of 500.

● The number of tracks reaches the maximum of 3,000.

Automatic recording :

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted.

(See “Music Box

姞 settings” later in this section.)

Stopping recording :

To stop the recording, select the “Stop REC” key button by touching the screen or using the

INFINITI controller.

If the CD is ejected, the audio system is turned off or the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position, the recording also stops.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-73

SAA2515

Playing recorded songs

Select the Music Box

姞 audio system by using one of the following methods.

● Push the audio source switch on the steering wheel repeatedly until the center display changes to the Music Box

姞 mode. (See

“STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CONTROLS

FOR AUDIO” later in this section.)

● Push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the Music

Box

姞 mode.

● Give voice commands. (See “INFINITI VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM” later in this section.)

Stopping playback :

The system stops playing when: a. another mode (radio, CD, DVD, USB memory, iPod or AUX) is selected.

b. the audio system is turned off.

c. the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position.

Next/Previous Track and

Fast Forward/Rewind :

When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while a track is being played, the track will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the track will return to the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a track is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track will be played.

When the rewind button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current track starts playing, the previous track will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to select tracks when a track is being played.

Play mode selection :

The TUNE/FOLDER knob will skip from album to album unless it is playing “All Songs” from the

Music Library menu. When playing “All Songs”, the knob will change the track instead of the album. The upper right corner of the main screen will indicate if the TUNE knob is changing by track or album.

Play pattern change :

When the button is pushed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

(Normal)

→ 1 Album Repeat → 1 Track Repeat →

1 Album Random

→ All Random → (Normal)

Tag Track :

Select “Tag Track” key on the screen when a track is being played. A menu will show the 5 available playlists. Select one of the playlists to add the current song to that playlist. If a playlist is not selectable (text is grayed out), it means the song already exists in that playlist.

4-74

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2516

There are some options available by selecting the “Menu” key on the screen during playback.

Select one of the following options that are displayed on the screen if necessary.

Now Playing :

Displays a track list to choose a preferred track for playback.

Music Library :

There are some options available during playback. Select one of the following options that are displayed on the screen if necessary.

Artists

Play tracks by an artist whose music is currently being played. The artists are sorted in alphabetical order.

Albums

Play tracks in each album. The albums are sorted in alphabetical order.

Add Songs by Artist

Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order. Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks by the artist. Select tracks from the list to add to the Playlist.

Edit Songs Order

Reorder the tracks in the Playlist by selecting a track and specifying the order.

All Songs

Play tracks from all recorded tracks. The tracks are sorted in alphabetical order.

Genres

Play tracks by a selected genre.

My Playlists :

Edit Name

Edit the name of the Playlist using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW

TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER” earlier in this section.)

Delete Songs

Delete tracks in the Playlist by selecting from the displayed song list.

Displays the Playlist and edits the Playlist if necessary.

Play Mode :

Select the “Edit” key.

The following items are available

Add Current Songs

Add a current track to the Playlist.

Add Songs by Album

Displays a list of albums in alphabetical order. Selecting an album displays all of the tracks in the album. Select tracks from the list to add to the Playlist.

Choose the preferred play mode from the following items.

● Normal

● 1 Album Repeat

● 1 Track Repeat

● 1 Playlist Random

● 1 Artist Random

● 1 Album Random

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-75

● 1 All Track Random

● 1 All Random

Edit Music Information :

Displays the following information about the

Music Box

姞 to edit if necessary.

Edit Information of Current Song

Edit the “Track”, “Artist” and “Genre” information of the current track using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO USE

TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in this section.)

Edit the “Mode” information by selecting from the list.

Edit Information by Album

Edit the displayed name and of a selected album and the track information in the album.

Update Gracenote from USB Device

Update the in-vehicle Gracenote Database using a USB memory. Search the title from a information acquired on the Internet.

Visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/music-update/ for details.

Transfer Missing Titles to USB

Transfer the information of an album recorded without titles to a USB memory.

Visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/music-update/ for details.

Update Gracenote from HDD

Search the title using the database in the hard disk drive.

SAA2517

Music Box

姞 settings

To set the Music box

姞 to your preferred settings, select the “ Menu ” key during playback, and the “ Music Box Settings ” key with the

INFINITI controller, and then push the

ENTER

button.

Music Box Used/Free Space :

Information about “Saved Album”, “Saved

Track” and “Remaining Time” is displayed.

Automatic Recording :

When this item is turned to ON, the Music Box

姞 automatically starts recording when a CD is inserted.

4-76

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Delete Songs from Music Box :

Deletes the current song, selected songs or albums by choosing from the list, or all songs/albums in the Music Box

姞.

Recording Quality :

Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132 kbps. The default is set to 105 kbps.

CDDB Version :

The version of the built-in Gracenote Database is displayed.

Gracenote

NOTE:

The information contained in the Gracenote

Database is not fully guaranteed.

The service of the Gracenote Database on the

Internet may be stopped without prior notice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF

THE TERMS BELOW.

Gracenote

姞 MusicID姞 Terms of Use

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California

(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote

(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information

(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote

Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device. You agree that you will use Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any

Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE

NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERV-

ERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will

Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide.

You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the

Gracenote service.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-77

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EX-

PRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-

ITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-

ABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE

DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE

SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO

CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR

FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Copyright :

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote

姞. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote

Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.

This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;

#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,

#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,

#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from

Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

SAA3162

FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

The front auxiliary input jacks are located in the console box. NTSC compatible devices such as video games, camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks.

Compatible audio devices, such as some MP3 players, can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary jacks. The images from the connected device can be viewed on the front and rear displays.

4-78

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identification purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the power of the portable device.

With a compatible device connected to the jacks, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the display switches to the AUX mode. The output from the device will be played through the monitor and audio system.

SAA2597

How to use AUX button

Images being played can be switched to the center display if NTSC/PAL compatible devices are connected to the front auxiliary input jacks in the console box.

Push the button on the instrument panel to perform switching. The above display will appear when the “Menu” key is selected using the INFINITI controller.

AUX video will not be displayed on the front display unless the parking brake is set.

To display the front AUX images on the rear displays, push button on the remote controller for the Dual Head Restraint DVD

System. (See “DUAL HEAD RESTRAINT DVD SYS-

TEM” later in this section.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-79

SAA2496

AUX Menu

When the “Menu” key on the display is selected while in the AUX mode, the menu screen will be displayed.

Display Mode :

Choose the display mode from the following items.

● Normal

● Wide

● Cinema

Volume Settings :

Choose the volume setting from the following items.

● Low

● Medium

● High

Display :

Adjust the image quality of the screen, select the preferred adjustment items.

SAA0451

CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND

CLEANING

CD/DVD

● Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never touch the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.

4-80

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

USB memory

● Never touch the terminal portion of the USB memory.

● Do not place heavy objects on the USB memory.

● Do not store the USB memory in highly humid locations.

● Do not expose the USB memory to direct sunlight.

● Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory.

Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for the details.

1. Audio source switch

2. Menu control switch

3. Back switch

4. Volume control switch

STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED

CONTROLS FOR AUDIO

Menu control switch

SAA3156

While the display is showing a MAP, STATUS or

Audio screen, tilt the switch upward or downward to select a station, track, CD or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a different function than tilting up/down for less than 1.5

seconds.

AM and FM radio :

● Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the preset station.

● Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds will seek up or down to the next station.

XM Satellite Radio :

● Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the preset channel.

● Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds will go to the next or previous category.

iPod

:

● Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the track number.

● Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds will skip to the next or previous index.

CD :

● Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the track number.

● Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds will increase/decrease the folder number (if playing compressed audio files).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-81

DVD :

● Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the track number.

● Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the title number.

● When the transparent operation menu appears, the switch will control the menu.

USB :

● Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the track number.

● Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds will increase/decrease the folder number

Music Box

:

● Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the track number.

● Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds will increase/decrease the album (folder) number (if playing compressed audio files).

Bluetooth

streaming audio :

● Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the track number.

BACK switch

Push this switch to go back to the previous screen or cancel the selection if it is not completed.

Volume control switches

Push the upper (+) or lower (

⫺) side switch to increase or decrease the volume.

Audio source switch

Push the audio source switch to change the mode as follows.

AM

→ FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3 →

CD/DVD

→ Music Box姞 → USB/iPod姞 →

Bluetooth

姞 streaming audio → AUX

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the 3rd row seat window.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film near the 3rd row

seat window or attach any metal parts to it.

This may cause poor reception or noise.

When cleaning the inside of the 3rd row seat

window, be careful not to scratch or damage the 3rd row seat window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

4-82

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

DUAL HEAD RESTRAINT DVD SYSTEM (if so equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the Dual Head

Restraint DVD System, you can enjoy playing video files via a DVD, CD or USB memory that provides images and sound both from the front and rear display screens.

You can also enjoy compatible auxiliary devices such as video games, camcorders or portable video players through the auxiliary jacks.

The front and right/left rear displays can show different sources individually. The maximum of

3 audio sources, such as an iPod

姞, DVD and auxiliary device, can be enjoyed at the same time.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the Dual

Head Restraint DVD System while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake to view the images on the front center display screen using the DVD player.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the system in ex-

tremely high or low temperature condition

[below

4°F (20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, do not

operate the system for more than 15 minutes without starting the engine.

The front display is designed not to show the images while driving, as the driver’s attention must be given to vehicle operation for safety.

Sounds are available. To show the images in the front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Rear displays

CAUTION

The glass screen on the liquid crystal display

may break if hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.

Use soft, damp cloth when cleaning the Dual

Head Restraint DVD System components. Do not use solvents or cleaning solutions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-83

SAA3329

The rear displays are located on the back of the front head restraints.

Use the remote controller to operate the rear display screen.

Push the preferred side (L or R) of the power

ON/OFF button on the remote controller to activate the rear display.

The rear screens can also be activated using the

INFINITI controller. (See “REAR DISPLAY settings” earlier in this section.)

Do not block the range of the wireless remote controller receiver and wireless headphones transmitter

.

SAA3330

Rear auxiliary input jacks

The rear auxiliary input jacks are located at the rear of the center console. NTSC/PAL compatible devices can be connected to the auxiliary jacks. The images from the connected device can be viewed on the rear displays.

The rear auxiliary jacks are color coded for identification purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

4-84

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the power of the portable device.

To display rear the AUX screen, push the preferred side (L or R) of the AUX (L)/AUX (R) buttons (rear input jacks) on the remote controller.

The connected device from the rear auxiliary input jacks cannot be displayed on the front screen.

It is also possible that the headphones may be too far from the transmitter which is in the rear display screen. This is not a malfunction.

The sound may also be interrupted temporarily when there is an obstacle between the headphones and the transmitter. Remove the obstacle, such as opaque materials, hands, hair, etc.

SAA3077

Headphones

Headphones are a wireless type and no cables are necessary. The headphones can only be used in the rear seat.

Power ON/OFF :

Push the power ON/OFF button to turn the headphones on or off.

SAA3078

Volume control :

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the volume.

The headphones will automatically turn off in about 4 minutes if there is no sound during that period. The headphones will also turn off after approximately 4 hours of continuous use. To prevent the battery from being discharged, keep the power turned off when not in use.

If the sound from the headphones is not clear, it may be due to interference from an infrared communication device or a cellular phone. If this happens, turn down the headphone volume or stop using the headphones.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-85

SAA3079

Channel change :

When the rear displays are playing different sources, slide the channel select switch to select the sound (“A ch” is the sound on the left display. “B ch” is the sound on the right display.).

SAA3158

Remote controller

The remote controller has the following controls:

1. DVD button

2. Joystick

4-86

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. AUX button (front input jacks)

4. ENTER button

5. DISP (Display) button (L or R)

6. VOLUME CONTROL button (

7. TRACK/CHANNEL button (

8. Power ON·OFF button (L or R) or or )

9. AUX (L)/AUX (R) buttons (rear input jacks)

10. USB button

11. BACK button

12. SOUND button

13. Keypad

)

See “Remote controller operation” later in this section for the function of each button.

SAA3326

Select rear displays audio source :

The AUX (L) button or AUX (R) button (REAR) selects each screen source individually

.

The DVD button, USB button or AUX button

(Front) selects the source for front and rear screens at once

.

SAA0978

SAA3081

Remote controller and headphones battery replacement

CAUTION

An improperly disposed battery can harm

the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-87

When changing batteries, do not let dust or

oil get on the components.

To replace the battery:

1. Open the lid as illustrated.

● For headphones, remove the screw

䊊 with a flat-bladed screwdriver before removing the lid.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

2. Replace both batteries with new ones.

● Recommended battery:

Size AA × 2 (DVD remote controller)

Size AAA × 2 (headphones)

● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

● Make sure that the 丣 and 䊞 ends on the batteries match the markings inside the compartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

● If you will not be using the remote control for long periods of time, remove the batteries.

● Replacement of the batteries is needed when the remote control only functions at extremely close distances to the Dual

Head Restraint DVD System or when it does not function at all.

BEFORE OPERATING DUAL HEAD

RESTRAINT DVD SYSTEM

Precautions

Start the engine when using the Dual Head

Restraint DVD System.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the Dual

Head Restraint DVD System or wear the headphones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

4-88

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

Only operate the Dual Head Restraint DVD

System while the vehicle engine is running.

Operating the Dual Head Restraint DVD System for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery.

Do not allow the system to get wet. Exces-

sive moisture such as spilled liquids may cause the system to malfunction.

While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD

player does not guarantee complete functionality of all VIDEO-CD formats.

Parental level (parental control)

Video data with the parental control setting can be played with this system. Please use your own judgement to set the parental control with the system.

Disc selection

You can play the following disc formats with the

DVD player:

● DVD-VIDEO

● DVD-AUDIO*

● VIDEO-CD

● DTS-CD

* DVD-AUDIO may not be playable depending on the system.

Use DVDs with the region code “ALL” or the code applicable to your country. (The region code is displayed as a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD.) This vehicle-installed DVD player can only play DVDs with an applicable region code.

Available audio sources

The following sources are available to play on each display:

Front display :

● Radio

● CD/DVD

● USB memory/iPod

● Music Box姞

● Bluetooth姞 audio

● AUX (FRONT)

Rear display :

● DVD

● USB memory with video files

● AUX (FRONT/REAR)

Front display

SAA3069

SAA3082

Rear display

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-89

PLAYING DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)

DISC·AUX button

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD player while watching the images.

Insert a DVD into the CD/DVD slot with the labeled side up. The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot. When ejecting the DVD, push the EJECT button.

Push the AUX·DVD button on the instrument panel and turn the display to the DVD mode, and begin playing DVD automatically.

When a DVD is loaded, it will begin playing automatically.

The front screen will be turned on when the

AUX·DVD button is pushed while a DVD is being played, and it will turn off automatically after a period of time. To turn it on again, push the

AUX·DVD button again.

Adjust Front/Rear displays

Front display :

To adjust the front display mode, push the DISP button on the center multi-function control panel. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

Rear display :

To adjust the rear display mode, push the preferred side (L or R) of the “DISP” (Display) button on the remote controller.

DVD operation keys

To operate the DVD player, select the preferred key displayed on the operation screen using the

INFINITI controller.

PAUSE :

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER button to pause the DVD. To resume playing the

DVD, use the “PLAY” key.

To pause the DVD, it is also possible to push the

“ ” button on the keypad of the remote controller.

PLAY :

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER button to start playing the DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD.

To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to push the “ ” button on the keypad of the remote controller.

4-90

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

STOP :

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER button to stop playing the DVD.

To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to push the “ ” button on the keypad of the remote controller.

SKIP (FORWARD) :

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward. The chapters will advance the number of times the ENTER button is pushed.

To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible to push the “ of the remote controller.

” button on the keypad

SKIP (REWIND) :

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters will go back the number of times the ENTER button is pushed.

To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also possible to push the “ ” button on the keypad of the remote controller.

/ Commercial Skip :

This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-VR.

Select the “ ” or “ ” key to skip forward or backwards by the set amount as defined in the DVD settings menu.

To skip forward or backward, it is also possible to push the “ ” or “ ” button on the keypad of the remote controller.

Front screen

SAA2498

SAA3082

Setting keys

Select the “Settings” key with the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button to adjust the following settings.

The items indicated with “ * ” can also be set from the rear display. Push the “ DVD” button on the remote controller while a DVD is being played. Select the preferred item using the joystick “ ” on the remote controller and push the ENTER “ ” button.

Key (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO) :

Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed.

: Move the cursor to select a DVD menu.

Enter: Enter the selected menu.

Move: Change the display location by moving the operation key.

Back: Return to the previous screen.

Hide: Hide the operation key.

Title Menu (front)/Menu (rear) (DVD-VIDEO) :

Menus specific to each disc will be shown. For details, see the instructions attached to the disc.

Rear screen

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-91

Title Search (DVD-VIDEO) :

A scene that belongs to a specified title will be displayed each time the “+” side or “

⫺” side is selected.

Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO) :

DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the

“Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on.

10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, CD-DA) :

Select the “10 Key Search” key and push the

ENTER button to open the number entry screen.

Input the number you want to search for and select the “OK” key with the INFINITI controller.

Then push the ENTER button. The specified

Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.

CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO) :

The amount of seconds for CM Skip can be set to 15, 30 or 60 seconds.

Angle (DVD-VIDEO) :

If the DVD contains different angles (such as moving images), the current image angle can be switched to another one.

DRC (DVD-VIDEO) :

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows tuning of the dynamic range of sound recorded in the Dolby Digital format.

DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD) :

Select the “Angle” key and push the ENTER button. When the “+” side or “

⫺” side is selected, the angle will change.

Select the “DVD Language” key and push the

ENTER button to open the number entry screen.

Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO) :

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a different angle.

Input the number corresponding to the preferred language and select the “OK” key with the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER button. The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one selected.

Display :

Adjust the image quality of the screen, select the preferred adjustment items and push the

ENTER button.

4-92

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio :

Choose the preferred language using the

INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.

Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO) :

Choose the preferred language using the

INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.

To turn off the subtitles, push and hold the

ENTER button until a beep sounds.

Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD) :

Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or

“Cinema” mode using the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button again.

Play Mode :

Choose the preferred play mode using the

INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.

Remote controller operation

Use the remote controller to adjust the following items.

Rear display ON/OFF :

The rear displays can be activated or deactivated individually.

To activate or deactivate the rear displays, push the preferred side (L or R) of the “ON·OFF” button on the remote controller.

Joystick :

Use the joystick to select the items displayed on the rear screen.

ENTER button :

Push the ENTER button to make the selected item complete on the rear screen.

BACK button :

Push to go back to the previous screen or cancel the selection.

DVD mode :

To select the DVD mode, push the DVD button.

AUX mode :

The AUX (auxiliary input jacks) modes can be activated or deactivated individually. To activate the AUX mode, push the preferred side (L or R) of the AUX button. Push the AUX button again and deactivate the AUX mode and display another mode.

Volume :

To control the volume level, push the VOL button or .

Display :

Display settings can be set individually for the right and left screens.

Push the preferred side (L or R) of the DISP button to adjust the rear display settings.

Sound :

To change the language, push the SOUND button. Each time the button is pushed, the language will change to each language stored in the DVD.

Track/Channel :

Push to skip to the previous or next DVD scene selection.

Rear display settings

To adjust rear display setting, select the preferred key and push the ENTER

The following settings are available: button.

Aspect :

Select the display size from “CINEMA”, “WIDE”,

“FULL” or “NORMAL” using the joystick on the remote controller.

Picture Mode :

To adjust the display brightness automatically, select the “Brightness” key and then select from “DARKER”, “NORMAL” or “BRIGHTER”.

When adjusting manually, select “OFF” and adjust using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left.

Keypad :

: PLAY/PAUSE button

: STOP button

To adjust tint, color, contrast or black level, select a key using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left.

: FORWARD button

: REWIND button

Push the BACK button on the remote controller to apply the settings and return to the previous display.

: FORWARD button for commercial skip

(for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-VR) or still images (for DVD-AUDIO)

: REWIND button for commercial skip (for

DVD-VIDEO and DVD-VR) or still images

(for DVD-AUDIO)

To return the adjustment levels to the default value, select “Execute” next to “Initialization” using the joystick on the remote controller and push the ENTER button. The “Execute” key is deactivated when the picture mode settings are already in the default value.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-93

Color System :

To choose the color system, select from “NTSC”,

“PAL”, “PAL-60”, “PAL-M”, “PAL-N” or “AUTO” using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left.

3D Y/C filter :

Set to ON/OFF using the joystick on the remote controller. When turned on, small characters and an outline of the shapes will be displayed more clearly than when turned off.

AUX Volume Setting :

To set the AUX volume, select from “HIGH”,

“LOW” or “MIDDLE” using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left.

OPERATING TIPS

● The images from a device that is connected to the rear auxiliary input jacks cannot be viewed on the front displays.

● It is not possible to switch the source to USB

(if so equipped) or DVD using the remote controller when the rear display is in the AUX mode. Push the AUX (L)/(R) button in the remote controller and turn off the AUX mode, and then push the preferred mode switch.

● It is not possible to display different video files, such as DVD or video files in the USB memory, on the front and rear displays at the same time (models with navigation system).

● It is not possible to play an audio file and a video file in the same USB memory at the same time (models with navigation system).

Multiple source display

It is possible to play different sources on each display. The following example shows how to operate multiple sources.

1. Display a video file in the front display by selecting the DVD mode.

2. Push the L side on the power ON·OFF button on the remote controller. The left rear display comes on and the DVD screen will be displayed.

3. Push the R side on the power ON·OFF button on the remote controller. The right rear display comes on and the DVD screen will be displayed.

4. Switch the source on the front display to an audio source. The sound from the speakers switches according to the front display. The rear display continues to display the DVD.

5. Turn on a pair of headphones and listen to the DVD on the rear displays using the headphones.

6. Connect an auxiliary device into the AUX jacks and push the AUX (L) or AUX (R) button on the remote controller. The selected side of the rear display turns to the

AUX mode. The other rear display continues to display the DVD.

7. Turn on the other pair of headphones. If the sound from the headphones is not from the AUX jacks, switch the channel with the channel select switch on the headphones.

4-94

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the surfaces of your Dual Head Restraint DVD

System (DVD player face, screen, remote controller, etc.).

CAUTION

Do not use any solvents or cleaning solu-

tions when cleaning the video system.

Do not use excessive force on the monitor

screen.

Avoid touching or scratching the monitor

screen as it may become dirty or damaged.

Do not attempt to operate the system in ex-

treme temperature conditions [below

4°F

(

20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)].

Do not attempt to operate the system in ex-

treme humidity conditions (less than 10% or more than 75%).

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in your INFINITI, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the electronic control modules and electronic control system harness.

WARNING

A cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.

If you must make a call while your vehicle is

in motion, the hands-free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires

you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

Keep the antenna as far away as possible

from the electronic control modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm)

away from the electronic control system harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as

recommended by the manufacturer.

Connect the ground wire from the CB radio

chassis to the body.

For details, consult an INFINITI retailer.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-95

BLUETOOTH

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

WARNING

Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a

safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you find yourself unable to devote full at-

tention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner of a compatible Bluetooth

姞 enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth

姞 wireless technology, you can make or receive a telephone call with your cellular phone in your pocket.

phone module when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position with the registered cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth

姞 cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

The INFINITI Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands, so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible. For more details, see “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYS-

TEM” later in this section; page 4-106.

Before using the Bluetooth

姞 Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

● Some Bluetooth姞 enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list.

● You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:

Once a cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no phone connecting procedure is required anymore. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle

– Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.

4-96

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, behind a tall building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked in order not to be dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

● Immediately after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth

姞 wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual.

● If the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System seems to be malfunctioning, please visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone pairing procedure specific to your phone, battery charging, cellular phone antenna, etc.

● The antenna display on the monitor will not coincide with the antenna display of some cellular phones.

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as well as to minimize its echoes.

● If reception between callers is unclear, adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s

RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and

2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth

姞 is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to

Clarion Co., Ltd.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth

姞 Hands-Free Phone System features using the INFINITI Voice Recognition system.

For more details, see “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNI-

TION SYSTEM” later in this section; page 4-106.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-97

CONTROL BUTTONS

1) PHONE SEND button

SAA3163 SAA2519

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

1. Push the button, and select the

“Connect Phone” key.

SAA2520

2. When a PIN code appears on the screen, operate the compatible Bluetooth

姞 cellular phone to enter the PIN code.

The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for the details. You can also visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth or call

INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on pairing INFINITI recommended cellular phones.

When the connection process is completed, the screen will return to the Phone menu display.

4-98

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PHONE SELECTION

Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered to the system. To switch to connect another cellular phone, push PHONE button and select the

“Connected Phones” key. The registered cellular phones are shown on the list. If you select a cellular phone that is different from the one currently connected, the newly selected phone will be connected to the system.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

This vehicle has two phonebooks available for hands-free use. Depending on the phone, the system may automatically download the entire cell phone’s phonebook into the “Handset

Phonebook”. For the details about downloading a phonebook, see “PHONE SETTING” later in this section. If a phonebook does not automatically download, the vehicle phonebook may be set for up to 40 entries. This phonebook allows the recording of a name to speak while using voice recognition.

SAA2521

1. Push the button and select the

“Vehicle Phonebook” key.

2. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the screen.

SAA2522

3. Choose the method for entering the phonebook entry. For this example, select

“Enter Number by Keypad”.

4. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key.

(See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in this section.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-99

SAA2523

5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name to speak when using the INFINITI

Voice Recognition system.

6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak the name after the tone.

7. When the voicetag is successfully saved, select the “OK” key to save the phonebook entry.

8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will show a screen that is ready to call the number. Push the BACK button to return to the Vehicle Phonebook.

There are different methods to input a phone number. Select one of the following options instead of “Enter Number by Keypad” in step 3.

Copy from Call History

The system will show a list of incoming, outgoing or missed calls that were downloaded from the connected cellular phone

(depending on the phone’s compatibility).

Select one of these entries to save in the vehicle phonebook.

Copy from the Handset

The system will show the connected cellular phone’s phonebook that was downloaded

(depending on the phone’s compatibility).

Select one of these entries to save in the vehicle phonebook.

SAA2620

Editing the Vehicle Phonebook

1. Push the button and select the

“Vehicle Phonebook” key.

2. Select the desired entry from the displayed list.

3. Select the “Edit” key.

4. Select the desired item to change.

4-100

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2523

The following editing items are available:

● Entry #

Changes the displayed number of the selected entry.

● Name

Edit the name of the entry using the keypad displayed on the screen.

● Number

Edit the phone number using the keypad displayed on the screen.

● Type

Select an icon from the icon list.

● Voicetag

Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags allow easy dialing using the INFINITI Voice

Recognition system. (See “INFINITI VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM” later in this section.)

To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at step 3.

SAA2524

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow this procedure.

1. Push the button on the steering wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear on the display.

2. Select the “Handset Phonebook” key on the “PHONE” menu.

3. Select the desired entry from the list.

4. Confirm the correct entry by selecting for the correct number from the list.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-101

Dial Number

Input the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW

TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in this section.)

SAA2621

5. Select the “Call” key to start dialing the number.

There are different methods to make a call.

Select one of the following options instead of

“Handset Phonebook” in step 2 above.

Vehicle Phonebook

Select an entry stored in the Vehicle’s

Phonebook.

Call History

Select an outgoing, incoming or missed call downloaded from your cell phone (depending on your phone’s compatibility).

4-102

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2525

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display will change to the incoming call mode. To receive a call, perform one of the following procedures listed below.

a) Select the “Answer” key.

b) Push the wheel.

button on the steering

There are some options available when receiving a call. Select one of the following displayed on the screen.

Answer

Accept an incoming call to talk.

Hold Call

Put an incoming call on hold.

Reject Call

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, perform one of the following procedures listed below.

a) Select the “Hang up” key.

b) Push the wheel.

button on the steering

SAA2526

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.

Select one of the following displayed on the screen if necessary.

Hang up

Finish the call.

Use Handset

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute

Mute your voice to the person.

Keypad

Using the touch tone, send digits to the connected party for using services such as voicemail.

Cancel Mute

This will appear after “Mute” is selected.

Mute will be canceled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or

⫺) on the steering wheel or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone. This adjustment is also available in the SETTING mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-103

SAA3280

PHONE SETTING

To set up the Bluetooth

姞 Hands-Free Phone

System to your preferred settings, push the

SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the “PHONE” key.

Edit Vehicle Phonebook

To edit the vehicle phonebook, use the same procedure as described in “VEHICLE PHONE-

BOOK” earlier in this section.

Delete Phonebook

The vehicle phonebook entries can be deleted all at the same time or one by one.

Download Handset Phonebook

Download the contacts registered in a

Bluetooth

姞 cellular phone. Availability of this function depends on each cellular phone. The memory downloading procedure from the cellular phone also varies according to each cellular phone. See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details.

When “Auto Download” is active, the system will automatically re-download the entries registered in the phone every time it is paired with the vehicle, even after you delete the entries from your vehicle’s Handset Memory.

Volume

The following kinds of phone volume can be set.

Pushing the PHONE button and selecting the

“Volume” key can also operate the same settings.

Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call

To increase or decrease the volume, select the “Ringtone”, “Incoming Call” or “Outgoing Call” key and adjust it with the INFINITI controller.

Automatic Hold

When this function is activated, an incoming phone call is automatically held.

Vehicle Ringtone

When this function is activated, a specific ringtone that is different from the cellular phone will sound when receiving a call.

Auto Download

When this item is activated and supported by a compatible phone, the phonebook of the hands-free phone is automatically downloaded at the same time that the hands-free phone is connected.

When this item is active, the system will automatically re-download the entries registered in the connected phone even after you delete the entries from your vehicle’s Handset Memory.

4-104

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag.

Solution

1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM” later in this section; page

4-106.)

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “VEHICLE PHONEBOOK” earlier in this section.)

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-105

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

INFINITI Voice Recognition allows hands-free operation of the Phone, Navigation, Information and Audio systems in one of two modes, Standard Mode or Alternate Command Mode.

In Standard Mode, commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system. You can complete your desired operation by simply following the prompts given by the system. (See “INFINITI

VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE” later in this section for details.)

For advanced operation, you can use the Alternate Command Mode. (See “INFINITI VOICE REC-

OGNITION ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE” later in this section for details.) When this mode is active, an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pushing the TALK switch, and the voice command menu prompts are turned off. Review the expanded command list, which is available when this mode is active.

Note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and the ways of speaking each command are increased.

To switch one mode to another, see each mode description later in this section.

To improve the recognition success rate when

Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that

Alternate Command Mode be turned off and

Standard Mode be used for the best recognition performance.

For the voice commands for the navigation system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s

Manual of your vehicle.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION

STANDARD MODE

The following section is applicable when the

Standard Mode is activated.

The Standard Mode enables you to complete the desired operation by simply following the prompts that appear on the display and also are announced by the system.

SAA2529

Activating Standard Mode

When the Alternate Command Mode is active, perform the following steps to switch to the

Standard Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4-106

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2530

4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key.

5. The indicator turns off and the Standard

Mode activates.

Displaying user guide

If you use the INFINITI Voice Recognition system for the first time or you do not know how to operate it, you can display the User Guide for confirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide, which contains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands.

SAA2531

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “User Guide” key.

5. Select a preferred item.

You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say

“Help”.

Available items :

● Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate the

INFINITI Voice Recognition system.

● Let’s Practice

Mode that allows practicing by following the instructions of the system voice.

● Using the Address Book

Tutorial for entering a destination by using the Address Book.

● Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)

Tutorial for entering a destination by street address.

● Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation.

● Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the system.

Note that the Command List feature is only available when Alternate Command Mode is active.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-107

SAA2532

Getting Started

Before using the INFINITI Voice Recognition system for the first time, you can confirm how to use commands by viewing the Getting Started section of the User Guide.

1. Select the “Getting Started” key.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the INFINITI controller.

Tutorials on the operation of the INFINITI Voice

Recognition system

If you choose “Using the Address Book”, “Finding a Street Address” or “Placing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to perform these operations using INFINITI Voice Recognition.

SAA2534

Let’s Practice

This mode helps learn how to use the INFINITI

Voice Recognition system.

1. Select the “Let’s Practice” key.

2. After the message screen appears, push the TALK switch on the steering wheel.

3. Speak the displayed number after the tone. The evaluation screen will be displayed and the result can be confirmed.

4-108

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2533

Useful tips for correct operation

You can display useful speaking tips to help the system recognize your voice commands correctly.

Select “Help on Speaking” to start display.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initialized, which may take up to one minute. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the TALK switch is pushed before the initialization completes, the display will show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.” or a beep sounds.

Before starting

To get the best recognition performance from

INFINITI Voice Recognition, observe the following:

● The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command.

● Speak in a natural conversational voice without pausing between words.

● If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be recognized more easily.

SAA3164

Giving voice commands

1. Push the TALK steering wheel.

switch located on the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-109

SAA2535

2. A list of commands appears on the screen, and the system announces,

“Would you like to access Phone, Navigation, Information, Audio or Help?”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to , speak a command.

Selecting the “Practice” key will start the practice mode. See “Let’s Practice” earlier in this section.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts and speak after the tone sounds until your desired operation is completed.

Operating tips :

● Say a command after the tone.

● Commands that are available are always shown on the display and spoken through voice menu prompts. Commands other than those that are displayed are not accepted.

Please follow the prompts given by the system.

● If the command is not recognized, the system announces, “Please say again”. Repeat the command in a clear voice.

● Push the BACK button once to return to the previous screen.

● To exit the voice recognition system, push and hold the TALK switch. The message, “Voice canceled” will be announced.

● To skip the voice guidance function and give the command immediately, push the TALK switch to interrupt the system. Remember to speak after the tone.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the system feedback, push the volume control buttons [+] or [

⫺] on the steering switch or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement.

Selecting the “ Help ” key can display the detailed information of the each command.

4-110

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

How to speak numbers :

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)

Examples

● 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers

You can improve the recognition of phone numbers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers. For example, when you try to call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and the system will then ask you for the next three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition, the system will then ask for the last four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition performance.

When speaking a house number, speak the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is included in the house number, it will not be recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you speak “oh” instead of “zero”.

Please speak

“zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the letter “o (oh)”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-111

Command List

Category Command:

Command

Phone

Navigation

Information

Audio

Help

Phone Command:

Command

Dial Number

Vehicle Phonebook

Handset Phonebook

Call history Incoming Calls

Outgoing Calls

Missed Calls

International Call

Change Number

Action

Operates the Phone function

Operates the Navigation function

Displays the vehicle Information function

Operates the Audio function.

Displays User Guide

Action

Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.

Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook.

Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

Makes a call to the incoming call number.

Makes a call to the dialed number.

Makes a call to the Missed calls number.

Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

4-112

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Navigation Command:

Command

Home

Address

Places

Address Book

Previous Destinations

Information Command:

Command

Fuel Economy

Maintenance

Traffic Information

Where am I?

Audio Command:

Command

AM

FM

XM

Music Box

CD

Action

Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.

Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.

Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Sets a route to a previous destination.

Action

Displays fuel economy information.

Displays maintenance information.

Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.

Displays your current location.

Action

Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

Turns to the XM Satellite band, selecting the channel last played.

Turns on the Music Box

姞 hard disk drive audio system.

Starts to play a CD.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-113

General Commands:

Command

Go back

Exit

Action

Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen

Cancels Voice Recognition

4-114

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Voice command examples

To use the INFINITI Voice Recognition function, speaking one command is sometimes sufficient, but at other times it is necessary to speak two or more commands. As examples, some additional basic operations by voice commands are described here.

For navigation system commands, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA3164

Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone number

800-662-6200:

1. Push the TALK steering wheel.

switch located on the

SAA2535

2. The system announces, “Would you like to access Phone, Navigation, Information,

Audio or Help?”

3. Speak “Phone”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-115

4. Speak “Dial Number”.

SAA2536 SAA2537

5. Speak “8 0 0”.

Selecting the “Manual Controls” key switches the screen to the keypad to input the phone number manually.

SAA2538

6. The system announces, “Please say the next three digits or dial, or say change number.”

7. Speak “6 6 2”.

4-116

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2539

8. The system announces, “Please say the last four digits” or say change number.

9. Speak “6 2 0 0”.

SAA2540

10. The system announces, “Dial or Change

Number?”

11. Speak “Dial”.

12. The system makes a call to 800-662-

6200.

Note :

● You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10 continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 continuous digits), if the area code is not necessary.

However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is recommended for improved recognition. (See

“How to speak numbers” earlier in this section.)

● You can only say a phone number using the

3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using this command. Please use the “International

Call” command for all other formats.

● If you say “Change Number” during phone number entry, the system will automatically request that you repeat the number using the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the area code first and then follow the prompts.

● Do not add a “1” in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers.

● If the system does not recognize your command, please try repeating the command using a natural voice. Speaking too slow or too loudly may further decrease recognition performance.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-117

SAA3164

Example 2 - Placing an international call to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:

1. Push the TALK steering wheel.

switch located on the

SAA2535

2. The system announces, “Would you like to access Phone, Navigation, Information,

Audio or Help?”

3. Speak “Phone”.

4. Speak “International Call”.

SAA2536

4-118

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. Speak “011811112223333”.

SAA2541 SAA2542

6. Speak “Dial”.

7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222-

3333.

Note :

Any digit input format is available in the International Number input process.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION

ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE

The following section is applicable when Alternate Command Mode is activated.

When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an expanded list of commands can be used after pushing the TALK switch. In this mode, available commands are not fully shown on the display or prompted. Review the expanded command list when this mode is active. See examples of Alternate Command Mode screens.

Please note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and ways of speaking each command are increased. To improve the recognition success rate, try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode. (See

“Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate

Command Mode)” later in this section.) Otherwise it is recommended that Alternate Command Mode be turned OFF and Standard Mode be used for the best recognition performance.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-119

SAA2529

Activating Alternate Command Mode

When the Standard Mode is active, perform the following steps to switch to the Alternate Command Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel.

2. Highlight the “Others” key.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key.

SAA2543

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” key.

5. The confirmation message is displayed on the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate the Alternate Command Mode.

Displaying command list

If you are controlling the system by voice commands for the first time or do not know the appropriate voice command, perform the following procedure for displaying the voice command list (available only in Alternate Command

Mode).

SAA2544

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “Command List” key.

4-120

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. Select a category from the list.

SAA2545 SAA2546

6. Select an item.

7. If necessary, scroll the screen using the

INFINITI controller to view the entire list.

8. Push the BACK button to return to the previous screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-121

List of help commands

Phone Commands:

Dial Number

Vehicle Phonebook

Handset Phonebook

Call History

Command

Incoming Calls

Outgoing Calls

Missed Calls

International Call

Navigation Commands:

Command

Home

Address

Places

Address Book

Previous Destinations

Previous Start Point

Delete Destination

Action

Makes a call to a spoken phone number.

Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook.

Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

Makes a call to the incoming call number.

Makes a call to the dialed number.

Makes a call to the Missed calls number.

Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Action

Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.

Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.

Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Sets a route to a previous destination.

Sets a route to a previous starting point.

Deletes a destination.

4-122

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Commands:

Command

Fuel Economy

Maintenance

Where am I?

Traffic Information

Weather Information

Weather Map

Audio Commands:

Command

Music Box

CD

FM

AM

XM

USB

Bluetooth Audio

AUX

Displays fuel economy information.

Displays maintenance information.

Displays your current location.

Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.

Displays weather information.

Displays a weather map.

Action

Action

Turns on the Music Box

姞 hard disk drive audio system.

Starts to play a CD.

Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

Turns to the XM Satellite Radio band, selecting the station last played.

Turns on the USB memory.

Turns on the Bluetooth

姞 audio player.

Turns on the AUX.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-123

Help Commands:

Command List

User Guide

Speaker Adaptation

Command

Navigation Commands

Phone Commands

Audio Commands

Information Commands

Help Commands

General Commands:

Command

Go back

Exit

Action

Displays the navigation command list.

Displays the phone command list.

Displays the audio command list.

Displays the information command list.

Displays the help command list.

Displays the User Guide.

The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.

Action

Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen

Cancels Voice Recognition

4-124

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2547

Displaying user guide

You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide, which contains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands.

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument panel.

2. Select the “Others” key using the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using the INFINITI controller and push the

ENTER button.

4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the

INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.

5. Highlight an item using the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.

Available items :

● Getting Started

Describe the basics of how to operate the

INFINITI Voice Recognition system.

● Let’s Practice

Mode that allows practicing by following the instructions of the system voice.

● Using the Address Book

Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

● Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)

Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

● Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation.

● Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctly speak commands in order for them to be properly recognized by the system.

● Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available voice recognition settings.

● Adapting the System to Your Voice

Tutorial adapting the system to your voice.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initialized, which may take up to one minute. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the TALK switch is pushed before the initialization completes the display will show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.” or a beep sounds.

Before starting

To get the best performance from INFINITI Voice

Recognition, observe the following.

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-125

● When the air conditioner is in the “AUTO” mode, the fan speed decreases automatically for easy recognition.

● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice command

1. Push and release the TALK located on the steering wheel.

SAA3164 switch

SAA2548

2. A list of commands appears on the screen, and the system announces,

“Please say a command”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to , speak a command.

Operating tips :

● Voice commands cannot be accepted when the icon is .

● The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting the menu control switch on the steering wheel.

4-126

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● If the command is not recognized, the system announces, “Please say again”. Repeat the command in a clear voice.

● Push the BACK button once to return to the previous screen.

● If you want to cancel the command, push and hold the TALK switch for 1 second. The message “Voice canceled” will be announced.

● To skip the voice guidance function and give the command immediately, push the TALK switch to interrupt the system. Remember to speak after the tone.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the system feedback, push the volume control switch (+ or

⫺) on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers :

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the following examples:

● 1-800-662-6200

– “Dial one eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero.”

Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five five six thousands”.

Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is included in the house number, it will not be recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you speak “oh” instead of “zero”. Please speak

“zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the letter “o (oh)”.

SAA2549

Speaker adaptation function (for

Alternate Command Mode)

The voice recognition system has a function to learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition performance. The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’s voice:

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the “Others” key.

2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-127

SAA2550

4. Select the user whose voice is memorized by the system.

5. Select the “Start Speaker Adaptation

Learning” key.

SAA2551

6. Select a category to be learned by the system from the following list.

● Phone Commands

● Navigation Commands

● Information Commands

● Audio Commands

● Help Commands

The voice commands in the category are displayed.

4-128

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

7. Select a voice command and then push the ENTER button.

The voice recognition system starts.

SAA2552

8. The system requests that you repeat a command after a tone.

9. After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to , speak the command that the system requested.

10. When the system has recognized the voice command, the voice of the user is learned.

Push the switch or BACK button to return to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command correctly, the voice command status on the right side of the command turns from “None” to

“Stored”.

SAA2553

Speaker Adaptation function settings :

Edit User Name

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen.

Delete Voice Data

Resets the user’s voice that the voice recognition system has learned.

Continuous Learning

When this item is turned to ON, you can have the system learn the voice commands in succession, without selecting commands one by one.

Minimize voice feedback (for

Alternate Command Mode)

To minimize the voice feedback from the system, perform the following steps.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key.

5. The setting is turned to ON and the voice guidance will now be reduced when using the Voice Recognition system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-129

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message

Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the system fails to interpret the command correctly.

Solution

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in the phonebook.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Bluetooth

姞 HANDS-

FREE PHONE SYSTEM” earlier in this section; page 4-96.)

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

4-130

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-131

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Operating range for engine start function. . . . . . . . 5-10

Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Intelligent Key battery discharge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Engine protection mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/prevention (LDP) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system. . . . . . . . . 5-24

Blind spot warning (BSW) system

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Bsw system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Bsw driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Bsw malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode . . . . . . . . .5-41

Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Conventional (FIXED SPEED) cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Preview function (for Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system equipped model). . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Precautions on distance control assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

Distance control assist operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Precautions on FCW system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

Intelligent brake assist (IBA) system

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80

Precautions on IBA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

INFINITI all-mode 4wd

姞 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

INFINITI all-mode 4wd

姞 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

4wd shift switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

4wd shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

4wd warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

Tow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

Snow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Braking precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Parking brake break-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

Preview function (Intelligent Cruise Control system equipped models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . 5-100

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101

Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101

Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101

Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101

Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101

Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Do not leave children or adults who would

normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain

colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

If you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-

ing the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

5-2

Starting and driving

Do not run the engine in closed spaces such

as a garage.

Do not park the vehicle with the engine run-

ning for any extended length of time.

Keep the lift gate closed while driving, oth-

erwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the lift gate open, follow these precautions:

1) Open all the windows.

2) Set the air recirculation to off and the fan control to high to circulate the air.

If electrical wiring or other cable connec-

tions must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

The exhaust system and body should be in-

spected by a qualified mechanic whenever:

– The vehicle is raised for service.

– You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.

– You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

– You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are

very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from

leaded gasoline seriously reduce the threeway catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in

the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat.

Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected.

Have the vehicle inspected promptly by an

INFINITI retailer.

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.

Do not race the engine while warming it up.

Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the

engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check all 4 tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Starting and driving

5-3

Additional information

● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pressure for all four tires.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires

(except the spare tire) on the display screen.

The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position. See

“TIRE PRESSURE information” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONI-

TORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates or LOW PRESSURE information is displayed on the monitor screen while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency” section for changing a flat tire.)

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

5-4

Starting and driving

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire

sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

The TPMS may not function properly when

the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. Some examples are:

● Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

● If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.

● If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator

When tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light illuminates.

This vehicle provides visual and audible signals to help you inflate the tires to the recommended

COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the selector lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.

Operation:

1. Add air to the tire.

2. In a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

● If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3 times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure.

Starting and driving

5-5

When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.

● If the hazard indicator does not flash in approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Tire

Inflation Indicator is not operating.

● The TPMS will not activate the Tire Inflation

Indicator under the following conditions:

– If there is interference from an external device or transmitter

– The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS system

– There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators

● If the Tire Inflation Indicator does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1m) backward or forward and try again.

If the Tire Inflation Indicator is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide side-

ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety

— Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read “DRIVING SAFETY PRECAU-

TIONS” later in this section.

5-6

Starting and driving

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.

● If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on underinflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage. See

“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury.

The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the

direction of the flat tire.

Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal.

Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

Starting and driving

5-7

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see “CHANGING

A FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency” section of this Owner’s Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your INFINITI is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your INFINITI is mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models are less capable than Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

Drive carefully when off the road and avoid

dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain.

Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead

drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward.

Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If

you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over.

Do not shift ranges while driving on downhill

grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle.

Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At

the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could cause an accident.

5-8

Starting and driving

If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to

the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over.

Always back straight down in R (Reverse) range. Never back down in N (Neutral), using only the brake, as this could cause loss of control.

Heavy braking going down a hill could cause

your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low range to control your speed.

Unsecured cargo can be thrown around

when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers.

To avoid raising the center of gravity exces-

sively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped) and evenly distribute the load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over.

Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steer-

ing wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.

Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the

driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened.

Always drive with the floor mats in place as

the floor may became hot.

Lower your speed when encountering strong

crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your INFINITI is more affected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.

Do not drive beyond the performance capa-

bility of the tires, even with 4WD engaged.

For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt

to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped ve-

hicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury (4WD models).

When a wheel is off the ground due to an

unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively.

Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneu-

vers or sudden braking may cause loss of control.

If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneu-

vers, particularly at high speeds. Your vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a conventional passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident.

Starting and driving

5-9

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.

Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.

Be sure to check the brakes immediately af-

ter driving in mud or water. See “BRAKE SYS-

TEM” later in this section for wet brakes.

Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If

you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured.

Whenever you drive off-road through sand,

mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. See the maintenance information in the “INFINITI

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

Spinning the rear wheels on slippery sur-

faces may cause the 4WD warning light to flash. The 4WD system may also automatically switch from the 4WD mode to the 2WD mode. This could reduce traction. Be especially careful when towing a trailer (4WD models).

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignition switch, be sure to move the selector lever to the

P (Park) position.

SSD0436

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START FUNCTION

The operating range for starting the engine inside the vehicle

䊊 is shown in the illustration.

● If the Intelligent Key is on the instrument panel, cargo area, inside the glove box or door pocket, or the corner of interior compartment, it may not be possible to start the engine.

● If the Intelligent Key is near the door or door glass outside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine.

5-10

Starting and driving

SSD1021

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change as follows:

● Push center once to change to ACC.

● Push center two times to change to ON.

● Push center three times to change to OFF.

(No position illuminates.)

● Push center four times to return to ACC.

● Open or close any door to return to LOCK during the OFF position.

The ignition switch is equipped with an antitheft steering lock device.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to LOCK until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. The ignition switch position indicator will not illuminate.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will change to the LOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, push the ignition switch to the OFF position. To unlock the steering wheel, push the ignition switch. If the steering lock release malfunction indicator appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display, push the push-button ignition switch again while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left. (See

“DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section.)

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display between the speedometer and tachometer.

(See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.

Starting and driving

5-11

OFF

The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-button ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended period.

This can discharge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure:

● Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 consecutive times, or

● Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

SSD0944

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to ACC.

NOTE:

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ACC or ON position or the engine is started by the above procedures, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display even if the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent

Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.

If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. (See “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

5-12

Starting and driving

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

● Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat restraints/headrests.

and adjust head

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed not to operate unless the selector lever is in either of the above positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.

● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little

(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to OFF. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal.

Crank the engine

with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push-button ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to OFF and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4.

Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

When racing the engine up to 4,000 rpm or more under the no load condition, the engine will enter the fuel cut mode.

Starting and driving

5-13

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5. To stop the engine, shift the selector lever to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

ENGINE PROTECTION MODE

The engine has an engine protection mode to reduce the chance of damage if the coolant temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer).

When the engine temperature reaches a certain level:

● The engine coolant temperature gauge will move toward the H position.

● Engine power may be reduced.

● The air conditioning cooling function may be automatically turned OFF for a short time

(the blower will continue to operate).

Engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed. The transmission will downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift points. You can also shift manually.

As driving conditions change and engine coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle speed can be increased using the accelerator pedal, and air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned back ON.

If:

1. The engine coolant temperature is not reduced.

2. The air conditioning cooling function does not turn back ON.

3. The engine oil pressure warning light illuminates or engine coolant temperature gauge does not return to the normal range from the H position, this may indicate a malfunction. Move the vehicle off the road to a safe area and allow the engine to cool. If after checking the oil and coolant, the remains on or engine coolant temperature does not return to the normal range, do not continue to drive and contact an INFINITI retailer.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may also come ON. You do not need to have your vehicle towed, unless it remains on, but have it inspected soon by an INFINITI retailer.

See “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AU-

DIBLE REMINDERS” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

5-14

Starting and driving

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. See “IF

YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

7 speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum efficiency and smooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the selector lever button before shifting the selector lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever.

This automatic transmission model is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch position is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of the P

(Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the

LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and push the selector lever button to shift into a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

Do not depress the accelerator pedal while

shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use cau-

tion when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while

vehicle is moving forward. Never shift to P

(Park), D (Drive) or manual shift mode while vehicle is moving rearward. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N

(Neutral) position while driving. Doing so can cause a loss of engine braking which may result in a collision, serious personal injury or death. In addition, coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

Starting and driving

5-15

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads.

This may cause a loss of control.

SSD0945

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and shift the selector lever from P

(Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or

Manual shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R

(Reverse). All other positions can be selected without pushing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running.

Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

Selector lever

Shifting

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressing the brake pedal,

: Push the button,

: Just move the selector lever.

The selector lever position indicator light (next to the selector lever) will be illuminated for approximately 30 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. The indicator light may also illuminate when the vehicle receives radio waves. This is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position.

P (Park) position :

Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button pushed in to move the selector lever from the N (Neutral) position or any drive position to

the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake.

5-16

Starting and driving

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

R (Reverse) :

Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position.

The brake pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button pushed in to move the selector lever from the P

(Park) position, the N (Neutral) position or any drive position to the R (Reverse) position.

N (Neutral) :

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive) :

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is in the manual shift gate, the transmission is ready for the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by moving the selector lever up or down.

When shifting up, move the selector lever to the

+ (up) side. The transmission shifts to the higher range.

When shifting down, move the selector lever to the

⫺ (down) side. The transmission shifts to the lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode, return the selector lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the normal driving mode.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M

1

M

2

M

3

M

4

M

5

M

6

M

7

M

7 (7th) :

Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.

M

6 (6th) and

M

5 (5th) :

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes.

M

4 (4th),

M

3 (3rd) and

M

2 (2nd) :

Use these positions for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.

M

1 (1st) :

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 7th gear. This reduces fuel economy.

● Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession.

Starting and driving

5-17

In the manual shift mode, the transmission

may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.

When this situation occurs, the Automatic

Transmission (AT) position indicator light (on the dot matrix liquid crystal display) will blink and the chime will sound.

In the manual shift mode, the transmission

automatically shifts down to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. When accelerating again, it is necessary to shift up to the desired range.

Accelerator downshift — In D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into the lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, push the switch to the OFF position and wait for 3 seconds. Then push the ignition switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have an

INFINITI retailer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

SSD0946

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the selector lever may not be moved from the P

(Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the selector lever button pushed.

To move the selector lever, perform the following procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover suitable tool.

using a

5-18

Starting and driving

PARKING BRAKE

4. Push down the shift lock as illustrated.

5. Push the selector lever button

䊊 and move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position lock.

while holding down the shift

Push the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.

If the battery is discharged completely, the steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have an INFINITI retailer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

Be sure the parking brake is fully released

before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.

Do not release the parking brake from out-

side the vehicle.

Do not use the gear shift in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

Do not leave children unattended in a ve-

hicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

SPA2331

To apply: Fully depress the parking brake pedal

.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake

.

2. Depress the parking brake pedal the parking brake will be released.

䊊 and

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

Starting and driving

5-19

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/

PREVENTION (LDP) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and above, and when it is traveling close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane.

Each system functions as follows:

● Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system — warns the driver by a warning light and chime.

● Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system — warns the driver by a warning light and chime, and helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center direction of the traveling lane by applying brake control to the left or right wheels individually (for a short period of time).

SSD1045

SSD0672

Lane departure warning light (orange)

The LDW and LDP systems monitor the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit

䊊 located inside the front map light cover.

When the camera unit detects that the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of the traveling lane, the lane departure warning light on the instrument panel blinks in orange and a warning chime sounds. When the LDP system is on, it will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time, using the function of the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM

Precautions on LDW system

WARNING

This system is only a warning device to in-

form the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The system will not operate at speeds below

approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.

5-20

Starting and driving

If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can-

cel automatically, and the lane departure warning light (orange) will illuminate.

If the lane departure warning light (orange)

illuminates, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the lane departure warning light (orange) continues to illuminate, have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warn-

ing chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

The system may not function properly under the following conditions:

● On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

● On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

● On roads where there are sharp curves.

● On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)

● On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

● When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.

● When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.

● When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.

● When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

● When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

● When a sudden change in brightness occurs.

(For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

SSD0672

Lane departure warning light (orange)

LDW system operation

The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and above. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime will sound and the lane departure warning light (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.

The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

Starting and driving

5-21

The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions.

– When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)

– When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

SSD0956

Warning systems switch

Turning on or off the LDW system (Type A) :

The LDW system is automatically turned on when the engine is started and the warning systems ON indicator light

䊊 illuminates on the warning systems switch. You can turn the

LDW system off by pushing the warning systems switch on the instrument panel. This switch will turn on and off the LDW, BSW and

FCW systems at the same time.

NOTE:

If you continue to push the warning systems switch from off to on for over 4 seconds, a chime will sound. This will change the default status of the LDW, BSW and FCW systems to OFF so that these systems will not automatically turn on when the engine is started. If this procedure is repeated, the default status will return to ON.

Turning on or off the LDW system (Type B) :

The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the LDW system when it is activated using the settings menu on the center display.

See “How to enable/disable the LDW system using the settings menu (Type B)” later in this section.

When the warning systems switch is turned off, the indicator

䊊 on the switch is off. The indicator will also be off if the LDW, the Blind

Spot Warning (BSW) and the Forward Collision

Warning (FCW) systems are deactivated.

For the BSW and FCW systems, see “BLIND

SPOT WARNING (BSW) SYSTEM” later in this section and “FORWARD COLLISION WARNING

(FCW) SYSTEM” later in this section.

5-22

Starting and driving

With navigation system

SSD0959

SSD1102

How to enable/disable the LDW system using the settings menu (Type B) :

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system.

1. Push the SETTING

䊊 button and highlight the “Driver Assistance” key on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER

䊊 button.

2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warnings” key, and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

JVS0080X

3. Highlight the “Lane Departure Warning” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

Temporary disabled status at high temperature

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F (40°C) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically. The lane departure warning light (orange) will flash.

When the interior temperature is reduced, the

LDW system will resume operating automatically and the lane departure warning light (orange) will stop flashing.

Starting and driving

5-23

LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP)

SYSTEM

Precautions on LDP system

WARNING

The LDP system will not steer the vehicle or

prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of vehicle at all times.

The LDP system is primarily intended for use

on well-developed freeways or highways. It may not detect the lane markers in certain roads, weather or driving conditions.

Using the LDP system under some condi-

tions of road, lane marker or weather, or when you change lanes without using the lane change signal could lead to an unexpected system operation. In such conditions, you need to correct the vehicle’s direction with your steering operation to avoid accidents.

When the LDP system is operating, avoid

excessive or sudden steering maneuvers.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle.

The LDP system will not operate at speeds

below approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.

The LDP system may not function properly

under the following conditions, and do not use the LDP system:

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.).

– When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow, etc.

– When driving off-road such as on sand or rock, etc.

– When driving on winding or uneven roads.

– When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift lane.

– When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

– When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, non-standard wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with nonoriginal brake parts or suspension parts.

– When towing a trailer or other vehicle.

If the LDP system malfunctions, it will cancel

automatically. The lane departure warning light (orange) on the instrument panel will illuminate.

If the lane departure warning light (orange)

illuminates, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light

(orange) continues to illuminate, have the

LDP system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warn-

ing chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

The functions of the LDP system (warning and brake control assist) may or may not operate properly under the following conditions:

● On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

● On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

5-24

Starting and driving

● On roads where there are sharp curves.

● On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDP system could detect these items as lane markers.)

● On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

● When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.

● When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.

● When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.

● When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

● When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

● When a sudden change in brightness occurs.

(For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

While the LDP system is operating, you may hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the LDP system is operating properly.

LDP ON indicator light (green)/

Warning light (orange)

SSD0672

LDP system operation

The LDP system provides a lane departure warning and brake control assistance when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 45

MPH (70 km/h) and above. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime will sound and the lane departure warning light (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the LDP system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.

Starting and driving

5-25

The warning and assist functions will stop when the vehicle returns to a position inside of the lane marker.

SSD0957

Dynamic driver assistance switch

The LDP system turns on when the dynamic driver assistance switch on the steering wheel is pushed when “Lane Departure Prevention” is enabled in the settings menu on the center display. The LDP ON indicator light (green) on the instrument panel will illuminate.

5-26

Starting and driving

SSD0959

SSD1102

How to enable/disable the LDP system using the settings menu :

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDP system.

1. Push the SETTING

䊊 button and highlight the “Driver Assistance” key on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER

䊊 button.

2. Highlight the “Dynamic Assistance Settings” key, and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

SSD1103

3. Highlight the “Lane Departure Prevention” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF

(disabled) and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

For the DCA system, see “DISTANCE CONTROL

ASSIST (DCA) SYSTEM” later in this section.

Automatic deactivation

Condition A :

The warning and assist functions of the LDP system are not designed to work under the following conditions:

● When you operate the lane change signal and change the traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDP system will be deactivated for approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)

● When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the warning and assist functions will resume.

Condition B :

The assist function of the LDP system is not designed to work under the following conditions (warning is still functional):

● When the brake pedal is depressed.

● When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary for the vehicle to change lanes.

● When the accelerator pedal is depressed while the brake control assist is provided.

● When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) approach warning occurs.

● When the hazard warning flashers are operated.

● When driving on a curve at high speed.

After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDP brake control assist function will resume.

Starting and driving

5-27

Condition C :

Under the following conditions, a beep will sound and the LDP system will be canceled automatically. The LDP ON indicator light will blink in green, and the LDP system cannot be activated:

● When the VDC system (except TCS function) or ABS operates.

● When the VDC system is turned off.

● When the SNOW mode switch is turned on.

● When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off the LDP system by pushing the dynamic driver assistance switch. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn the LDP system back on.

Temporary disabled status at high temperature :

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then the LDP system is turned on, the LDP system may be deactivated automatically. The lane departure warning light

(orange) will blink.

When the interior temperature is reduced, turn off the LDP system by pushing the dynamic driver assistance switch. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn the LDP system back on.

SSD0453

Lane camera unit maintenance

The lane camera unit

䊊 for the LDW/LDP system is located inside the map light cover. To keep the proper operation of the LDW/LDP systems and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

● Always keep the windshield clean.

● Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

5-28

Starting and driving

● Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane markers.

● Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, contact an INFINITI retailer.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system can help alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

SSD1085

The BSW system uses radar sensors

䊊 installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles beside your vehicle in an adjacent lane.

Starting and driving

5-29

SSD1030

Detection zone

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

The BSW system operates above approximately

20 MPH (32 km/h). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the BSW indicator light illuminates. If the driver then activates the turn signal, a chime will sound twice and the

BSW indicator light will flash.

WARNING

The BSW system is not a replacement for

proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the

BSW system.

The BSW system may not provide a warning

for vehicles that pass through the detection zone quickly.

SSD1086

BSW indicator light

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the BSW indicator light next to the outside mirror will illuminate in the direction of the detected vehicle. If the turn signal is then activated, the BSW indicator light flashes and a chime sounds twice. The indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.

The BSW indicator lights illuminate for a few seconds when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

5-30

Starting and driving

The brightness of the BSW indicator lights is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

A chime sounds if the radar sensors have already detected vehicles when the driver activates the turn signal. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the BSW indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. (See “BSW DRIVING

SITUATIONS” later in this section)

SSD0956

Warning systems switch

Turning on or off the BSW system

(Type A)

The BSW system is automatically turned on when the engine is started and the warning systems ON indicator light

䊊 illuminates on the warning systems switch. You can turn the

BSW system off by pushing the warning systems switch on the instrumental panel. This switch will turn on and off the LDW, BSW and

FCW systems at the same time.

NOTE:

If you continue to push the warning systems switch from off to on for over 4 seconds, a chime will sound. This will change the default status of the LDW, BSW and FCW systems to OFF so that these systems will not automatically turn on when the engine is started. If this procedure is repeated, the default status will return to ON.

Turning on or off the BSW system

(Type B)

The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the BSW system when it is activated using the settings menu on the center display.

See “How to enable/disable the BSW system using the settings menu” later in this section.

When the warning systems switch is turned off, the indicator

䊊 on the switch is off. The indicator will also be off if the BSW, the Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) and the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) systems are deactivated.

For the LDW and FCW systems, see “LANE

DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/PREVENTION (LDP)

SYSTEM” earlier in this section and “FORWARD

COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM” later in this section.

Starting and driving

5-31

5-32

Starting and driving

SSD0959

How to enable/disable the BSW system using the settings menu :

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.

1. Push the SETTING

䊊 button and highlight the “Driver Assistance” key on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER

䊊 button.

2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warnings” key, and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

JVS0080X

3. Highlight the “Blind Spot Warning” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

BSW system precautions

WARNING

Do not use the BSW system when towing a

trailer because the system may not function properly.

Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume,

open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

SSD1102

● The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, animals

– Several types of vehicles such as motorcycles

– Oncoming vehicles

– Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop

(See “BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS” later in this section)

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle

(See “BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS” later in this section)

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.

(See “BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS” later in this section)

– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.

(See “BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS” later in this section)

● Severe weather or road spray conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.

● The radar sensors detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width.

When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.

● The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operating condition.

SSD1026

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Another vehicle approaching from behind

The BSW indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

However, if the overtaking vehicle is traveling much faster than your vehicle, the indicator light may not illuminate before the detected vehicle is beside your vehicle. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes.

Starting and driving

5-33

SSD1031

If the driver activates the turn signal, then the

BSW indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the BSW indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

SSD1032

NOTE:

If you accelerate from a stop with a vehicle in the detection zone, the other vehicle may not be detected.

SSD1033

Overtaking other vehicles

The BSW indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 3 seconds.

The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

5-34

Starting and driving

SSD1034

If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the BSW indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice.

NOTE:

When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

SSD1036

Starting and driving

5-35

SSD1037

Entering from the side

The BSW indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

NOTE:

The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

SSD1038

If the driver activates the turn signal, then the

BSW indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the BSW indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when another vehicle is detected.

BSW temporarily not available

● When radar blockage is detected, the BSW system will be turned off automatically, a beep will sound and the BSW system warning light (orange) will blink. The BSW system is not available until the condition no longer exists.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Action to take:

When the above condition no longer exists, the

BSW system will resume automatically.

If the warning light (orange) continues to blink, have the BSW system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

BSW MALFUNCTION

When the BSW system malfunctions, they will be turned off automatically, a beep will sound and the BSW system warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine.

If the warning light (orange) continues to illuminate, have the BSW system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

5-36

Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL

SSD1085

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensor units

䊊 for the BSW system is located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors.

Consult an INFINITI retailer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz — 24.25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak

(0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3 m

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The CRUISE indicator light on the meter panel will then blink to warn the driver.

● If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise control system will be canceled automatically.

● If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your INFINITI retailer.

● The CRUISE indicator light may sometimes blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the RESUME/

ACCELERATE, SET/COAST or CANCEL switch.

To properly set the cruise control system, perform the steps below in the order indicated.

Starting and driving

5-37

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:

when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at

a set speed

in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed

on winding or hilly roads

on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

SSD0694

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

2. SET/COAST switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. Cruise control MAIN switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN switch on. The CRUISE indicator will come on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, follow any of these methods: a) Push the CANCEL switch.

b) Tap the brake pedal.

c) Move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position.

d) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE indicator light will turn off.

● If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/COAST switch and reset at the cruising speed, the cruise control will disengage. Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn it on again.

5-38

Starting and driving

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

● The cruise control will automatically cancel if the vehicle slows more than 7 MPH (12 km/h) below the set speed.

● If you move the selector lever to N (Neutral) position, the cruise control will be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET/COAST switch.

● Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.

● Push, then quickly release the

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about

1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/COAST switch and release it.

● Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

● Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

The ICC function can be set to one of two cruise control modes:

● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed.

● Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode:

For cruising at a preset speed.

WARNING

Always drive carefully and attentively when

using either cruise control mode. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

Starting and driving

5-39

In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.

5-40

Starting and driving

1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

Push the MAIN switch

䊊 to choose the cruise control mode between the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

䊊 and the conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode

.

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

MAIN switch

, quickly push and release the

. To choose the conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode hold the MAIN switch

䊊 proximately 1.5 seconds.

A

, push and for longer than ap-

SSD1051

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be changed to the other cruise control mode. To change the mode, push the MAIN switch once to turn the system off. Then push the MAIN switch again to turn the system back on and select the desired cruise control mode.

Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, see the following description. For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see “CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE

CONTROL MODE” later in this section.

SELECTING VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE

DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

MAIN switch

, quickly push and release the

.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

With ICC, the driver can maintain the same speed as other vehicles without the constant need to adjust the set speed as you would with a normal cruise control system.

WARNING

This system is only an aid to assist the driver

and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The system is primarily intended for use on

straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the system in city traffic or congested areas.

This system will not adapt automatically to

road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

SSD1047

PRECAUTIONS ON VEHICLE-TO-

VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

The system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

If the distance sensor

䊊 detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to 25% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

The distance sensor will not detect the following objects:

● Stationary and slow moving vehicles

● Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

● Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

● Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

Starting and driving

5-41

WARNING

As there is a performance limit to the dis-

tance control function, never rely solely on the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system.

This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.

If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

The system may not function properly under

the following conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.

5-42

Starting and driving

– On off-road surfaces such as on sand or rock, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

– When the windshield wipers are operating at high speed. The system may cancel when the wipers are set to the AUTO position.

– When strong light (for example, at sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill roads

– When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration

– When towing a trailer or other vehicle

In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle

or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. You may need to control the distance from other vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system when it is not recommended in this section.

SSD1047

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE OPERATION

Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance.

The vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode of the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode uses a sensor

䊊 located on the front of the vehicle to detect vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflector on the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot detect the signals:

● When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is positioned high on the vehicle (trailer, etc.)

● When the reflector on the vehicle ahead is missing, damaged or covered

● When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is covered with dirt, snow and road spray

● When the snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility

● When dense exhaust or other smoke (black smoke) from vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility

● When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of your vehicle

● When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.

The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation within the limitation of the system. When the sensor is covered with dirt or obstructs, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance and reduce the speed to match the slower vehicle ahead; the system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary, and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill.

However, the ICC system can only apply up to

25% of the vehicles total braking power. This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.

The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed falls below approximately 15

MPH (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The system will also disengage when the vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.

See “Approach warning” later in this section.

Starting and driving

5-43

The following items are controlled in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

● When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately

20 and 90 MPH (32 and 144 km/h).

● When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by driver, from the vehicle ahead.

The adjusting speed range is up to the set speed. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill with a warning chime.

● When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

5-44

Starting and driving

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited.

A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver

SSD0252

may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving

5-45

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.

SSD0253

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.

5-46

Starting and driving

SSD0964

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system switch

The system is operated by a MAIN switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

2. SET/COAST switch:

Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.

4. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following distance:

● Long

● Middle

● Short

5. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system

SSD1104

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.

Starting and driving

5-47

4. Indicates your vehicle

5. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

6. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system warning light (orange):

The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the ICC system.

SSD0979

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the indicators come on as illustrated to check for a burned-out bulb, and it turns off when the engine is started.

SSD1052

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push and release the MAIN switch

䊊 on. The MAIN switch indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on and in a standby state for setting.

5-48

Starting and driving

SSD1053

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it. (Vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

SSD1105

When the SET/COAST switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the set vehicle speed indicator will blink for approximately 2 seconds:

● When traveling below 20 MPH (32 km/h) and a vehicle ahead is not detected

● When the selector lever is not in the D or

Manual mode

● When the windshield wipers are operating at high speed. The system may cancel when the wipers are set to the AUTO position.

● When the brakes are operated by the driver

● When the parking brake is applied

Starting and driving

5-49

SSD1106

When the SET/COAST switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and the set vehicle speed indicator will blink.

● When the SNOW mode is pushed (SNOW mode switch) (To use the ICC system, turn off the SNOW mode switch, push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC and reset the ICC switch by pushing the MAIN switch again.)

For details about the SNOW mode switch, see “SNOW MODE” later in this section.

● When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position. (To use the ICC system, place the

4WD shift switch in the AUTO position, push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the

MAIN switch again (for 4WD models).

For details about the 4WD shift switch, see

“INFINITI ALL-MODE 4WD

姞” earlier in this section.

● When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the

MAIN switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the MAIN switch again.)

For details about the VDC system, see “VE-

HICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” later in this section.

● When ABS or VDC (including the traction control system) is operating

● When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight)

● When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping. Push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC, and reset the ICC system by pushing the MAIN switch again.)

5-50

Starting and driving

1. System set display with vehicle ahead

2. System set display without vehicle ahead

System operation

WARNING

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane

SSD1107

change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system.

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead.

The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead :

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.

The stoplights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.

When the brake operates, a noise may be heard or felt. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected :

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the

ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The

ICC system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.

Starting and driving

5-51

When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h), the system will be cancelled.

SSD1108

When passing another vehicle, the set vehicle speed indicator will flash when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change set vehicle speed

To cancel the preset speed, use any of these methods:

● Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.

● Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.

● Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the MAIN switch indicator and set vehicle speed indicator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET/COAST switch.

● Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 MPH or 5 km/h.

● Push, then quickly release the

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 MPH or 1 km/h.

5-52

Starting and driving

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/COAST switch and release it.

● Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 MPH or 5 km/h.

● Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 MPH or 1 km/h.

To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 MPH (32 km/h).

SSD0967

How to change set distance to vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.

Each time the DISTANCE switch

䊊 is pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again in that sequence.

Starting and driving

5-53

● The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.

SSD1109

● If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes “long”. (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes “long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

● The chime sounds.

● The vehicle ahead detection and set distance indicator blink.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:

● When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing

● When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle

The warning chime will not sound in the following cases:

● When your vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or moving slowly

● When the accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system

5-54

Starting and driving

SSD0284A

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects some reflectors

which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes or on the side of the road.

This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect these reflectors when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. The ICC sensor may also detect reflectors on narrow roads or in road construction zones. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled.

● When the vehicle speed falls below approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h)

● When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill

● When the selector lever is shifted to the N

(Neutral) position

● When the windshield wipers are operating at high speed. The system may cancel when the wipers are set to the AUTO position.

● When the VDC is turned off

● When the ABS or VDC operates

● When the parking brake is applied

● When the SNOW mode switch is pushed on.

● When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position (for 4WD models)

● When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight)

● When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor

● When a wheel slips

Starting and driving

5-55

SSD1110

Warning light and display

Condition A :

The chime sounds and the Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system is canceled automatically in the conditions described below. Part of the system display will come on or blink, making it impossible to set.

● When the VDC is turned off

● When the ABS or VDC operates

● When a tire slips

● When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight)

● When the SNOW mode switch is pushed on

● When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position

Action to take :

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC MAIN switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.

SSD0989

Condition B :

When the sensor window is dirty, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the ICC system is automatically canceled.

The chime sounds and the ICC system warning light (orange) will come on and the CLEAN

SENSOR indicator will appear.

Action to take :

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off. Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth and then perform the settings again.

5-56

Starting and driving

SSD0979

Condition C :

When the ICC system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the system warning light

(orange) will come on.

Action to take :

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the ICC system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

SSD1047

Sensor maintenance

The sensor for the Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC) system

䊊 is located below the front bumper.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

● Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe with a soft cloth carefully so as not to damage the sensor.

● Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor. Doing so could cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor is damaged due to an accident, contact an

INFINITI retailer.

Starting and driving

5-57

● Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE

CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

Pay special attention to the distance be-

tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.

Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system display.

Do not use the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions.

– when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed

5-58

Starting and driving

– in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed

– on winding or hilly roads

– on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

– in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

SSD0968

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switch

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

2. SET/COAST switch:

Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.

4. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

SSD1013

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators

The display is on the dot matrix liquid crystal display (in the vehicle information display) located between the speedometer and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Cruise set switch indicator:

Displays while the vehicle speed is controlled by the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode of the Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system.

3. Cruise system warning light:

Comes on if there is a malfunction in the cruise control system.

Starting and driving

5-59

SSD0969

Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, push and hold the MAIN switch

䊊 for longer than about 1.5 seconds.

When pushing the MAIN switch on, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system display and the main switch indicator are displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display. After you hold the

MAIN switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The main switch indicator stays lit. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the MAIN switch again will turn the system completely off.

5-60

Starting and driving

When the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system is on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode cannot be turned on even though the MAIN switch is pushed and held.

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, turn off the DCA system. See

“DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYSTEM” later in this section.

When the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the MAIN switch (vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the MAIN switch off when not using the ICC system.

SSD0970

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it. (The SET indicator will come on in the display.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods: a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indicator will turn off.

b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator will turn off.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the MAIN switch and SET indicator will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET/COAST switch.

b) Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE set switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.

c) Push, then quickly release the

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it.

b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled.

● When the vehicle slows down more than 8

MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed

● When the vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)

● When the selector lever is shifted to the N

(Neutral) position

● When the parking brake is applied

● When the VDC (including the traction control system) operates.

● When a wheel slips

SSD0979

Warning light

When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the system warning light

(orange) will come on.

Action to take :

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and then perform the setting again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

Starting and driving

5-61

PREVIEW FUNCTION (for Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system equipped model)

The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system with the preview function identifies the need to apply emergency braking by sensing the vehicle ahead in the same lane and the distance to the vehicle ahead and relative speed from it, it applies the brake pre-pressure before the driver depresses the brake pedal and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play.

For more details, see “INTELLIGENT CRUISE

CONTROL (ICC) SYSTEM” earlier in this section.

DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

The Distance Control Assist (DCA) system brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward according to the distance from and the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance.

WARNING

Always drive carefully and attentively when

using the Distance Control Assist system.

Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the DCA system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations.

Do not use the Distance Control Assist system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill with a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

The DCA system will not apply brake control

while the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal.

5-62

Starting and driving

The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

WARNING

This system is only an aid to assist the driver

and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

This system will not adapt automatically to

road conditions. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

SSD1047

PRECAUTIONS ON DISTANCE CONTROL

ASSIST SYSTEM

The system is intended to assist the driver to keep a following distance from the vehicle ahead traveling in the same lane and direction.

If the distance sensor

䊊 detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance.

The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to 25% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.

The distance sensor will not detect the following objects:

● Stationary and slow moving vehicles

● Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

● Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

● Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

WARNING

As there is a performance limit to the dis-

tance control function, never rely solely on the Distance Control Assist system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.

The system may not function properly under

the following conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the Distance Control Assist system under the following conditions:

– On roads with sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.

– On off-road surfaces such as on sand or rock, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

– When strong light (for example, at sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle

Starting and driving

5-63

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor

– On steep downhill roads (frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill roads

– When towing a trailer or other vehicle

In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle

or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. You may need to control the distance from other vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Always stay alert and avoid using the DCA system when it is not recommended in this section.

SSD1047

DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST

OPERATION

Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually decelerate to maintain the proper following distance. The

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system may not be able to decelerate the vehicle under some circumstances.

The DCA system uses a sensor

䊊 located on the front of the vehicle to detect vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflector on the vehicle ahead, the DCA system may not operate.

The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot detect the signals:

● When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is positioned high on the vehicle (trailer, etc.)

● When the reflector on the vehicle ahead is missing, damaged or covered

● When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is covered with dirt, snow and road spray

● When the snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility

● When dense exhaust or other smoke (black smoke) from vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility

● When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the luggage room of your vehicle

The DCA system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation. When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the DCA system may not detect them. In these instances, the Distance Control

Assist (DCA) system may not be able to decelerate the vehicle properly. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.

5-64

Starting and driving

The DCA system is designed to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance from the vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill.

However, the DCA system can only apply up to

25% of the vehicles total braking power. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the DCA system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the DCA system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.

See “Approach warning” later in this section.

This system only brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance from the vehicle ahead. Acceleration should be operated by the driver.

The DCA system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead.

Starting and driving

5-65

The detection zone of the sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the system to operate.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.

If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

5-66

Starting and driving

SSD0252

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the system to work inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0253 SSD0994

Distance Control Assist system display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.

1. Distance Control Assist (DCA) system switch indicator:

Indicates that the dynamic driver assistance switch is ON.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.

Starting and driving

5-67

3. Distance Control Assist system warning light (orange):

The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the DCA system.

SSD1049

Operating Distance Control Assist

(DCA) system

The DCA system turns on when the dynamic driver assistance switch on the steering wheel is pushed when “Distance Control Assist” is enabled in the settings menu in the center display. The DCA system switch indicator on the dot matrix liquid crystal display will illuminate.

The system will start to operate after the vehicle speed becomes above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h).

WARNING

When the DCA system is not necessary, be sure to turn off the dynamic driver assistance switch. Using the system when it is not necessary may result in an accident.

5-68

Starting and driving

SSD0959

How to enable/disable the DCA system using the settings menu :

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the DCA system.

1. Push the SETTING

䊊 button and highlight the “Driver Assistance” key on the display using the multi-function controller. Then push the ENTER

䊊 button.

2. Highlight the “Dynamic Assistance Settings” key, and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

SSD1103

3. Highlight the “Distance Control Assist” key, select ON or OFF and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

For the LDP system, see “LANE DEPARTURE

WARNING (LDW)/PREVENTION (LDP) SYSTEM” earlier in this section.

SSD1102

Starting and driving

5-69

SSD0996

Under the following conditions, the Distance

Control Assist system will not operate and the

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system switch indicator will blink:

● When the SNOW mode is pushed (SNOW mode switch) (To use the DCA system, turn off the SNOW mode switch, then turn on the dynamic driver assistance switch.)

For details about the SNOW mode switch, see “SNOW MODE” later in this section.

● When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position. (To use the DCA system, place the

4WD shift switch in the AUTO position, then turn on the dynamic driver assistance switch

(for 4WD models).

For details about the 4WD shift switch, see

“INFINITI ALL-MODE 4WD

姞” earlier in this section.

● When the VDC system is off (To use the DCA system, turn on the VDC, then push the dynamic driver assistance switch.)

For details about the VDC system, see “VE-

HICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” later in this section.

● When ABS or VDC (including the traction control system) is operating

● When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight)

When the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is operating, the DCA system will not operate. (To use the DCA system, turn the

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode off, then push the dynamic driver assistance switch.)

For details about the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see “INTELLIGENT CRUISE

CONTROL (ICC) SYSTEM” earlier in this section.

When the engine is turned off, the system is automatically turned off.

5-70

Starting and driving

1. System set display with vehicle ahead

2. System set display without vehicle ahead

SSD0997

System operation

WARNING

The Distance Control Assist system automatically decelerates your vehicle to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance from the vehicle ahead. Manually brake when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance upon sudden braking by the vehicle ahead or when a vehicle suddenly appears in front of you. Always stay alert when using the DCA system.

The Distance Control Assist (DCA) system helps assist the driver to keep a following distance to the vehicle ahead by braking and moving the accelerator pedal upward in the normal driving condition.

When a vehicle is detected ahead :

The vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on.

When vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead :

● If the driver’s foot is not on the accelerator pedal, the system activates the brakes to decelerate smoothly as necessary. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system.

● If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal.

When brake operation by driver is required :

The system alerts the driver by a warning chime and blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator. If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal after the warning, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward to assist the driver to switch to the brake pedal.

Starting and driving

5-71

The stoplights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the DCA system.

When the brake operates, a noise may be heard or felt. This is not a malfunction.

WARNING

When the vehicle ahead detection indicator

is not illuminated, system will not control or warn the driver.

Depending on the position of the accelerator

pedal, the system may not be able to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal appropriately.

If the vehicle ahead comes to a standstill,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will release brake control with a warning chime once it judges the vehicle is at a standstill. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

(The system will resume control automatically once the system reaches 3 MPH (5 km/h).

Overriding the system :

The following driver’s operation overrides the system operation.

● When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal even further while the system is moving the accelerator pedal upward, the DCA system control of the accelerator pedal is canceled.

● When the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal, the brake control by the system is not operated.

● When the driver’s foot is on the brake pedal, neither the brake control nor the alert by the system operates.

● When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is set, the DCA system will be cancelled.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and DCA system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

● The chime sounds.

● The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:

● When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing

● When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle

The warning chime will not sound when your vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.

5-72

Starting and driving

SSD0284A

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the sensor detects some reflectors

which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes or on the side of the road.

This may cause the DCA system to operate inappropriately. The sensor may detect these reflectors when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve.

The sensor may also detect reflectors on narrow roads or in road construction zones. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

SSD0996

Automatic cancellation

Condition A :

Under the following conditions, the Distance

Control Assist system is automatically canceled. The chime will sound and the Distance

Control Assist (DCA) system switch indicator will blink. The system will not be able to be set.

● When the VDC system is turned off

● When the VDC or ABS (including the traction control system) operates

● When the SNOW mode switch is turned on.

Starting and driving

5-73

● When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position (for 4WD models)

● When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight)

Action to take :

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off with the dynamic driver assistance switch. Turn the DCA system back on to use the system.

SSD0998

Condition B :

When the sensor window is dirty, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the DCA system is automatically canceled.

The chime sounds and the system warning light

(orange) will come on and the “CLEAN SENSOR” indicator will appear.

Action to take :

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off. Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth and then perform the settings again.

SSD0999

Condition C :

When the DCA system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the system warning light

(“CRUISE” orange) will come on.

Action to take :

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, and turn on the DCA system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

5-74

Starting and driving

Sensor maintenance

How to handle the sensor :

The sensor for the DCA system is common with

Intelligent Cruise Control and is located below the front bumper.

To handle the sensor, see “INTELLIGENT CRUISE

CONTROL (ICC) SYSTEM” earlier in this section.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system will warn the driver by a warning light and chime when your vehicle is getting close to the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

The FCW system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and above.

SSD1047

SSD0749

Vehicle ahead detection indicator

Starting and driving

5-75

The FCW system uses the distance sensor

䊊 located below the front bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead. When the system judges that your vehicle is getting close to the vehicle ahead in the travel lane, the vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks and a warning chime sounds.

PRECAUTIONS ON FCW SYSTEM

WARNING

The FCW system is intended to warn you be-

fore a collision but will not avoid a collision.

It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

As there is a performance limit, the system

may not provide a warning in certain conditions.

The system will not detect the following

objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway

– Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

The system will not detect another vehicle

under the following conditions:

– When the sensor gets dirty and it is impossible to detect the distance from the vehicle ahead.

– When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight)

The sensor generally detects the signals re-

turned from the reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, the system may not function properly under the following conditions:

– When the reflectors of the vehicle ahead are positioned high or close to each other

(including a small vehicle such as motorcycles).

– When the sensor gets dirty or it is impossible to detect the distance from the vehicle ahead.

– When the reflectors on the vehicle ahead are missing, damaged or covered.

– When the reflectors of the vehicle ahead are covered with dirt, snow or road spray.

– When visibility is low (such as rain, fog, snow, etc.).

– When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles is splashed.

– When dense exhaust or other smoke

(black smoke) from vehicles reduces the visibility of the sensor.

– When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the luggage room of your vehicle.

– When abruptly accelerating decelerating.

or

– On a steep downhill slope or on roads with sharp curves.

– When there is a highly reflective object near the vehicle ahead (i.e., being very close to another vehicle, signboard, etc.)

– When you are towing a trailer.

Depending on certain road conditions

(curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle conditions (steering position or vehicle position), or the preceding vehicle’s conditions

(position in lane, etc.), the system may not function properly. The system may detect highly reflective objects such as reflectors, signs, white markers, and other stationary objects on the road or near the traveling lane and provide unnecessary warning.

The system may not function in offset

conditions.

5-76

Starting and driving

The system may not function when the dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead is extremely close.

The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent plastic bag, etc., the system may not detect them. In these instances the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warn-

ing chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

A sudden appearance of a vehicle in front

(i.e., it abruptly cuts in) may not be detected and the system may not warn the driver soon enough.

The system will be cancelled automatically

with a beep sound and the IBA OFF indicator light will illuminate under the following conditions:

– When the sensor window is dirty

– When the system malfunctions

SSD1050

If the IBA OFF indicator light

䊊 illuminates with a beep sound, pull off the road to a safe location, stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. Check to see if the sensor window is dirty.

If the sensor window is dirty, clean it with a soft cloth and restart the engine. If the sensor window is not dirty, restart the engine. If the

IBA OFF indicator light continues to illuminate even if the IBA system is turned on with the IBA

OFF switch

, have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

To turn on the IBA system, see “INTELLIGENT

BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) SYSTEM” later in this section.

SSD0956

Warning systems switch

FCW system operation (Type A)

The FCW system is automatically turned on when the engine is started and the warning systems ON indicator light

䊊 illuminates on the warning systems switch. You can turn the

FCW system off by pushing the warning systems switch on the instrument panel. This switch will turn on and off the LDW, BSW and FCW systems at the same time.

Starting and driving

5-77

NOTE:

If you continue to push the warning systems switch from off to on for over 4 seconds, a chime will sound. This will change the default status of the LDW, BSW and FCW systems to OFF so that these systems will not automatically turn on when the engine is started. If this procedure is repeated, the default status will return to ON.

For the sensor maintenance, see “Sensor maintenance” earlier in this section.

SSD0956

FCW system operation (Type B)

The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the FCW system when it is activated using the settings menu on the center display.

See “How to enable/disable the FCW system using the settings menu” later in this section.

When the warning systems switch is turned off, the indicator

䊊 on the switch is off. The indicator will also be off if the FCW, the Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) and the Blind Spot

Warning (BSW) systems are deactivated.

For the LDW and BSW systems, see “LANE

DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/PREVENTION (LDP)

SYSTEM” earlier in this section and “BLIND

SPOT WARNING (BSW) SYSTEM” earlier in this section.

For the sensor maintenance, see “INTELLIGENT

CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) SYSTEM” earlier in this section.

5-78

Starting and driving

With navigation system

SSD0959

How to enable/disable the FCW system using the settings menu :

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the FCW system.

1. Push the SETTING

䊊 button and highlight the “Driver Assistance” key on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER

䊊 button.

2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warnings” key, and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

JVS0080X

3. Highlight the “Forward Collision Warning” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) and push the ENTER

䊊 button.

SSD1102

Starting and driving

5-79

INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system warns the driver by a warning light and chime when there is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane and the driver must take avoidance action immediately. The system helps reduce the rear-end collision speed by applying the brakes when the system judges that the collision cannot be prevented.

The IBA system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and above, and when your vehicle is driven at speeds approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) faster than the vehicle ahead.

The IBA system uses a distance sensor

䊊 located below the front bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead. When the system judges that your vehicle is getting close to the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane, the vehicle ahead detection indicator on the instrument panel blinks and a warning chime sounds.

The IBA system will be turned on/off by pushing the IBA OFF switch. The IBA OFF indicator light will illuminate when the system is turned off.

SSD1047

SSD0749

Vehicle ahead detection indicator

PRECAUTIONS ON IBA SYSTEM

WARNING

The IBA system is not a collision avoidance

system. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

As there is a performance limit, the system

may not provide a warning or braking in certain conditions.

The system will not detect the following

objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway

5-80

Starting and driving

– Motorcycles traveling offset in the traveling lane

– Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

The system will not detect another vehicle

under the following conditions:

– When the sensor gets dirty and it is impossible to detect the distance from the vehicle ahead.

– When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight)

The sensor generally detects the signals re-

turned from the reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, the system may not function properly under the following conditions:

– When the reflectors of the vehicle ahead are positioned high or close to each other

(including a small vehicle such as motorcycles).

– When the sensor gets dirty and it is impossible to detect the distance from the vehicle ahead.

– When the reflectors on the vehicle ahead are missing, damaged or covered.

– When the reflectors of the vehicle ahead are covered with dirt, snow or road spray.

– When visibility is low (such as rain, fog, snow, etc.).

– When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles is splashed.

– When dense exhaust or other smoke

(black smoke) from vehicles reduces the visibility of the sensor.

– When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the luggage room of your vehicle.

– When abruptly decelerating.

accelerating or

– On a steep downhill slope or on roads with sharp curves.

– When there is a highly reflective object near the vehicle ahead (i.e., being very close to another vehicle, signboard, etc.)

– When towing a trailer or other vehicle.

Depending on certain road conditions

(curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle conditions (steering position or vehicle position), or the preceding vehicle’s conditions

(position in lane, etc.), the system may not function properly.

The system may not function in offset

conditions.

The system may not function when the dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead is extremely close.

Starting and driving

5-81

Reflectors on the road

SSD0782

WARNING

The system may detect highly reflective ob-

jects such as reflectors, signs, white markers and other stationary objects on the road or near the traveling lane.

In extreme conditions, detection of these objects may cause the system to function.

The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent plastic bag, etc., the system may not detect them. In these instances the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warn-

ing chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

A sudden appearance of a vehicle in front

(i.e., it abruptly cuts in) may not be detected and the system may not warn the driver soon enough.

The system will be cancelled automatically

with a beep sound and the IBA warning light will illuminate under the following conditions:

– When the sensor window is dirty

– When the system malfunctions

If the IBA OFF indicator light illuminates with a beep sound, pull off the road to a safe location, stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. Check to see if the sensor window is dirty. If the sensor window is dirty, clean it with a soft cloth and restart the engine. If the sensor window is not dirty, restart the engine. If the IBA OFF indicator light continues to illuminate even if the IBA system is turned on, have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

SSD1050

IBA system operation

The IBA system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) or above, and when the vehicle’s speed is approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) faster than that of the vehicle ahead.

To turn the system off or on, push and hold the

IBA OFF switch

(located on the lower side of the instrument panel) for more than 1 second after starting the engine. When the IBA OFF indicator light

䊊 on the instrument panel turns off and the IBA OFF switch is pushed, the system will turn off and the IBA OFF indicator light will illuminate. When the IBA OFF switch is pushed again, the system will turn on and the

IBA OFF indicator light will turn off.

5-82

Starting and driving

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

The IBA system will remain in the last ON or OFF state it was left in until it is manually changed by pressing the IBA OFF switch.

Illumination of the IBA OFF indicator light without a beep sound is an indication that the IBA system is temporarily unavailable. It will occur under the following conditions:

– When driving into a strong light (for example, sunlight)

– When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position (for 4WD models)

The IBA OFF indicator light will turn off when the system returns to its normal operating conditions.

For the sensor maintenance, see “Sensor maintenance” earlier in this section.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle.

Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(805 km).

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.

● Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.

● Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Improper tire pressure will increase wear and waste fuel.

● Make sure the front wheels are properly aligned. Improper alignment will cause premature tire wear and lower fuel economy.

● Climate control operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

Starting and driving

5-83

INFINITI ALL-MODE 4WD

(if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped ve-

hicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI or 4LO

position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption.

If the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light turns on when driving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the 4HI position, shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO.

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission lever to the N (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to

AUTO.

If the 4WD warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

The transfer case may be damaged if you

continue driving with the 4WD warning light blinking.

INFINITI ALL-MODE 4WD

姞 SYSTEM

The all mode 4WD system provides 3 positions

(AUTO, 4HI and 4LO), so you can select the desired drive mode according to the driving conditions.

See “ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING

PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this section for other precautions for offroad driving.

5-84

Starting and driving

4WD shift procedure:

SSD1100

*1: The 4LO and 4HI indicator may flash alternately. Stop the vehicle and be sure to turn the 4WD shift switch after the transmission selector lever has been shifted to the N (Neutral) position. If the indicator keeps flashing after the 4WD shift procedure, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while.

Then the indicator will illuminate or turn off.

· Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to the 4LO position. Otherwise the gears may grind, damaging the drive system.

Starting and driving

5-85

*2: While changing in and out of the 4LO position, the engine must be running. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and the 4LO indicator will not be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure that the 4LO indicator turns on when shifting the 4WD shift switch to the 4L position. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light will also turn on when 4L is selected. (See “VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” later in this section.)

5-86

Starting and driving

The 4WD shift switch is used to select the 4WD mode depending on the driving conditions.

There are 3 types of drive modes available,

AUTO, 4HI and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to move between each mode, AUTO, 4H and 4L.

You must depress the 4WD shift switch to select

4L, and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the selector lever in the N (Neutral) position when changing into or out of 4L.

WARNING

When parking, apply the parking brake be-

fore stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator is on and the ATP warning light turns off. Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P (Park) position.

The 4LO and 4HI indicators must stop blink-

ing and the 4LO or 4HI indicator must remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear. If the selector lever is shifted from the N (Neutral) position to any other gear while the 4LO and 4HI indicators are blinking alternately, the vehicle may move unexpectedly.

CAUTION

Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4L

and 4H while driving.

The 4HI position provides greater traction.

Avoid excessive speed, as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures, and could damage drivetrain component. Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4HI is not recommended.

The 4LO position provides maximum trac-

tion. Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively, as the maximum speed is approximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).

When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift

switch to the AUTO or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing.

Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (between

AUTO and 4H) while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears for engine braking.

Do not operate the 4WD shift switch (be-

tween AUTO and 4H) with the rear wheels spinning.

Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the

4HI or 4LO position. Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise and tire wear. INFINITI recommends driving in the AUTO position under these conditions.

The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted

between 4HI and 4LO at low ambient temperatures and the 4LO and 4HI indicators may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted. After driving for a while you can change the 4WD shift switch between 4H and 4L.

When driving on rough roads,

● Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,

● Place stones or wooden blocks under the tires to free the vehicle.

● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4L.

● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat forward and backward movement to increase the movement.

● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire chains may be effective.

Starting and driving

5-87

CAUTION

Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires will

sink deep into the mud, making it difficult to free the vehicle.

Avoid shifting gears with the engine running

at high speeds as this may cause malfunction.

SSD1048

4WD SHIFT SWITCH

● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

AUTO, 4H or 4L position, depending on driving conditions.

● With the switch set to the AUTO position, distribution of torque to the front and rear wheels changes automatically, depending on road conditions encountered [ratio; 0 :

100 (2WD)

→ 50 : 50 (4WD)]. This results in improved driving stability.

If the 4WD shift switch is operated while mak-

ing a turn, accelerating or decelerating or if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while in the AUTO, 4H or 4L, you may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.

When the vehicle is stopped after making a

turn, you may feel a slight jolt after the selector lever is shifted to N (Neutral) or P (Park) position. This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a malfunction.

CAUTION

When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift

switch to the AUTO or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing.

Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driv-

ing on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears for engine braking.

Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the

rear wheels spinning.

Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H

position from AUTO, ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system.

5-88

Starting and driving

Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4L

and 4H while driving.

Engine idling speed is high while warming

up the engine. Be especially careful when starting or driving on slippery surfaces with the 4WD shift switch in AUTO.

4WD shift indicator

SSD1058

4WD SHIFT INDICATOR

The 4WD shift indicator is displayed in the vehicle information display.

The indicator should turn off within 1 second after placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch. (See the 4WD shift procedure list shown in the “INFINITI ALL-MODE

4WD

姞 SYSTEM” earlier in this section.)

The 4WD shift indicator may blink while shift-

ing from one drive mode to the other. When the shifting is completed, the 4WD shift indicator will come on. If the indicator does not come on immediately, make sure the area around the vehicle is safe, and drive the vehicle straight, accelerate or decelerate or move the vehicle in reverse, then shift the

4WD shift switch.

● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD shift indicator turns off.

4WD WARNING LIGHT

Warning light

Comes on or blinks when:

Illuminates

Blinks rapidly

Blinks slowly

There is a malfunction in the

4WD system

The transfer case oil temperature is abnormally high

The difference in wheel rotation is large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

Starting and driving

5-89

The 4WD warning light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off soon after the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the 4WD warning light will either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD shift indicator turns off.

High-temperature transfer case oil makes the

4WD warning light blink rapidly (about twice per second). If the warning light blinks rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately. Then if the light turns off after a while, you can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the 4WD warning light blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Change the 4WD shift switch to AUTO and do not drive fast.

CAUTION

If the 4WD warning light comes on or blinks

slowly during operation or rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a while, have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

Shifting between 4HI and 4LO is not recom-

mended when the 4WD warning light turns on.

When the 4WD warning light comes on, the

2WD mode may be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be especially careful when driving. If corresponding parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted.

Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI or 4LO

position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on when driving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the AUTO or 4HI position, shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO.

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever to the N (Neutral) position and shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO.

If the 4WD warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

The transfer case may be damaged if you

continue driving with the warning light blinking.

5-90

Starting and driving

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

WARNING

Never rely solely on the hill start assist sys-

tem to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.

The hill start assist system is not designed

to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill.

Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system may not prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:

● The transmission is shifted to a forward or reverse gear.

● The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.

The hill start assist system will not operate when the transmission is shifted to the N

(Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level road.

When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light illuminates in the meter, the hill start assist system will not operate.

(See

“WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE RE-

MINDERS” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

Starting and driving

5-91

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING

Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Never leave the engine running while the

vehicle is unattended.

Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SD1006MA

Safe parking procedures require that both

the parking brake be applied and the transmission be placed in the P (Park) position.

Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident.

Make sure the automatic transmission se-

lector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB:

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

5-92

Starting and driving

TOW MODE

SIC4474

The TOW MODE should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle in the TOW MODE with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced, and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.

Push the TOW MODE switch to activate TOW

MODE. The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illuminates when the TOW MODE is selected. Push the TOW MODE switch again to turn the TOW MODE OFF.

TOW MODE is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

SNOW MODE

SIC4454

For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy roads or slippery areas, turn the SNOW mode on.

To turn the SNOW mode on, push the SNOW mode switch. The SNOW mode indicator light on the meter panel will illuminate. When the SNOW mode is activated, engine output is controlled to avoid wheel spin.

To turn the SNOW mode off, push the switch and the indicator on the meter panel will turn off. Turn the SNOW mode off for normal driving and fuel economy.

Starting and driving

5-93

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking ability at two wheels.

You may feel a small click and hear a sound when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly.

This is not a malfunction and indicates that the brake assist mechanism is operating properly.

Hydraulically-assisted brakes

The hydraulically-assisted brake system is designed to use a hydraulic pump driven electrically, to assist braking. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the foot brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the foot brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle. The stopping distance will be longer.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by an

INFINITI retailer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will cause overheating of the brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster and reduce gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

5-94

Starting and driving

BRAKE ASSIST

WARNING

While driving on a slippery surface, be care-

ful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

If the engine is not running or is turned off

while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

● The pre-pressure function ceases when the following conditions are met: a) When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

b) If the driver does not operate the accelerator or brake pedal within approximately 1 second.

c) When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or

4L position (for 4WD models).

PREVIEW FUNCTION (Intelligent Cruise

Control system equipped models)

When the Preview Function identifies the need to apply emergency braking by sensing a vehicle ahead in the same lane and the distance and relative speed from it, it applies the brake pre-pressure before the driver depresses the brake pedal and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play.

● This system will not operate when the vehicle is moving at approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) or less.

Starting and driving

5-95

SSD0338

● The sensor will not detect: a) Pedestrians or objects in the roadway b) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane c) Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane as illustrated

WARNING

This system is only an aid to assist braking

operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

As there is a performance limit to the Pre-

view Function, never rely solely on this system. This system does not correct careless inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Reduce vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.

The system may not detect the vehicle in

front of you in certain road or weather conditions. The Preview Function may not operate properly under the following conditions. The vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions and the Brake Assist will operate.

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor

– When strong light (for example, at sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle

– Winding or hilly roads may cause the sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may detect objects or vehicles in other lanes.

– Vehicle position in the lane may cause the sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may detect objects or vehicles in other lanes.

When the Preview Function operates, the

brake pedal may move slightly and may make a small noise. This is not a system malfunction.

5-96

Starting and driving

SSD0471

Warning light and display

When the Preview Function is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the system warning light (orange) will come on.

Action to take :

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine and resume driving.

If the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the

Preview Function is malfunctioning (the brake is operative). Although the Vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

How to handle the sensor

The sensor for the Preview Function is common with Intelligent Cruise Control and is located below the front bumper.

To keep the Preview Function operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

● Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe with a soft cloth carefully so as not to damage the sensor.

● Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor. Doing so could cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor is damaged due to an accident, contact an

INFINITI retailer.

● Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a so-

phisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

Tire type and condition may also affect brak-

ing effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. See

“TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see “WHEELS

AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Starting and driving

5-97

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up.

Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,

5-98

Starting and driving

you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH

(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the

ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions.

● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

● Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions).

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the VDC warning light in the instrument panel flashes so note the following:

● The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

● Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC warning light illuminates in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system. The VDC off indicator illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning light flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off, and the VDC warning light will not flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on position.

When the 4L position is selected with the 4WD shift switch, the VDC system is disabled and the

VDC off indicator light illuminates.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

The VDC system is designed to help improve

driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If

suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not INFINITI recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the VDC warning light may illuminate.

If brake related parts such as brake pads,

rotors and calipers are not INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the

VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate.

If engine control related parts are not

INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC warning light illuminate.

may

When driving on extremely inclined surfaces

such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

When driving on an unstable surface such as

a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the VDC warning light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

Starting and driving

5-99

If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI rec-

ommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate.

The VDC system is not a substitute for winter

tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

SIC4455

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system ON for most driving conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch. The VDC off indicator light will illuminate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system.

5-100

Starting and driving

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the outside temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see “ENGINE

COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see “ENGINE COOLING SYS-

TEM” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITI recommends the use of MUD

& SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Consult an INFINITI retailer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see “TIRE

CHAINS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

For four-wheel drive

If you install snow tires, they must also be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very

cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions.

Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

Whatever the condition, drive with caution.

Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.

Starting and driving

5-101

Allow more stopping distance under these

conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distances on slip-

pery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These

may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

Do not use the cruise control on slippery

roads.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases un-

der your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist in cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20°F (

⫺7°C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

WARNING

Do not use your engine block heater with an

ungrounded electrical system or a

2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Disconnect and properly store the engine

block heater cord before starting the engine.

Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-

sion cord rated for at least 10A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt

(GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.

Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

5-102

Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Changing a flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Towing recommended by INFINITI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . 6-17

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

In the event of a roadside emergency, Roadside

Assistance Service is available to you. Please refer to your Warranty Information Booklet

(U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information Booklet (Canada) for details.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure:

● Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 consecutive times, or

● Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if so equipped) appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal display, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light.

This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section, “TIRE PRESSURE information” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

6-2

In case of emergency

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates or LOW PRESSURE information is displayed on the monitor screen while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire

sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

Make sure the parking brake is securely ap-

plied and the automatic transmission is in the P (Park) position.

Never change tires when the vehicle is on a

slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.

Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

In case of emergency

6-3

MCE0001A

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks

䊊 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

SCE0872

Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the lift gate.

2. Raise the cargo floor board handle

䊊 using the

, then hang it on the edge of the lift gate opening

䊊 using the hook

.

SCE0923

WARNING

When removing jacking tools, be sure the rubber sound suppressor

, used to control jack stand from rattling against metal, is not attached to the

6-4

In case of emergency

jacking tool. If rubber sound suppressor remains on jack when vehicle is being jacked up, the vehicle will be unstable and may fall off jack stand causing serious injury of death.

3. Remove the cargo floor cover.

4. Remove the jacking tools.

7. Locate the oval opening above the middle of the rear bumper.

8. Place the T-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it towards the spare wheel winch assembly, located directly above the spare wheel.

SCE0915

5. Securely screw to connect the T-shaped end of the jack rod and two extension bars

䊊 as illustrated.

6. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle

.

In case of emergency

6-5

SCE0916

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown.

9. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into the T-shaped opening of the spare wheel winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare wheel winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare wheel.

SCE0377

10. Once the spare wheel is completely lowered, remove the jack rod and reach under the vehicle to remove the hanging plate.

11. Carefully slide the spare wheel from under the rear of the vehicle.

After preparing the spare tire, to remove the rod, pull out the rod while moving the rod to the right and left with the screw of the extension facing the side.

6-6

In case of emergency

CAUTION

When storing the wheel, make sure that the hanging plate is in the center of the wheel and then lift it up into the storage area.

SCE0917

CAUTION

When storing the wheel, be sure to mount the wheel horizontally. Securing the wheel that is in a tilted position as illustrated may cause looseness and dropping of the wheel while driving. Lower the wheel on the ground again, and make sure that the hanging plate is properly set. Hang the wheel again and make sure that the wheel is held horizontally, then store the wheel.

Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

Never use blocks on or under the jack.

Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is

on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.

Do not allow passengers to stay in the ve-

hicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.

Jacking up the vehicle and removing the damaged tire

WARNING

Never get under the vehicle while it is sup-

ported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

Use only the jack provided with your vehicle

to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles.

The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any

other part of the vehicle for jack support.

In case of emergency

6-7

SCE0875

Jack-up point

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up points as illustrated.

The jack should be used on level firm ground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench.

Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

6-8

In case of emergency

SCE0876

NCE130

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown.

4. Carefully raise the vehicle until the clearance between the tire and ground is achieved.

5. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands and turn the jack lever.

NOTE:

Before jacking up the vehicle, make sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the vehicle is lifted up with the engine running, the auto-leveling suspension will become disabled after 120 seconds. To reset the autoleveling suspension, cycle the ignition switch

ON/OFF one time.

SCE0910

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence as illustrated (

) until they are tight.

,

,

,

,

,

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated.

Lower the vehicle completely.

In case of emergency

6-9

WARNING

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened

wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or

nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle

has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km)

(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the

COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction.

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack and tools in the storage area.

2. Close the cargo floor cover.

3. Replace the cargo floor board.

4. Close the lift gate.

WARNING

Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use.

Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

If needed Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty Information

Booklet (Canada).

6-10

In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING

If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to

a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.

Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in

the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.

Do not allow battery fluid to come into con-

tact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns.

If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.

Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

The booster battery must be rated at 12

volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

Whenever working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.

Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery.

It could explode and cause serious injury.

Your vehicle has an automatic engine cool-

ing fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty Information

Booklet (Canada).

In case of emergency

6-11

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.

1. Remove the engine compartment cover, if necessary. See “ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CHECK LOCATIONS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

SCE0920

2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle

, position the two vehicles (

䊊 and

) to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

3. Apply parking brake. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

4. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out moist cloth

䊊 to reduce explosion hazard.

5. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated (

→ → →

).

If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be turned. Supply power using jumper cables before pushing the ignition switch and disengaging the steering lock.

CAUTION

Always connect positive (+) to positive (+)

and negative (

) to body ground (as illus-

trated) — not to the battery.

Make sure the jumper cables do not touch

moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.

6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

7. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle

䊊 at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started

.

6-12

In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before trying again.

8. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable (

).

9. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

10. Put the battery cover on.

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannot be

push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.

Three way catalyst equipped models should

not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged.

Never try to start the vehicle by towing it;

when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not continue to drive if your vehicle over-

heats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never

remove the radiator cap or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside

Assistance Information Booklet (Canada).

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the climate control. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

In case of emergency

6-13

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)

Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest INFINITI retailer.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside

Assistance Information Booklet (Canada).

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from an INFINITI retailer. Local service operators are familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.

WARNING

Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.

Never get under your vehicle after it has been

lifted by a tow truck.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

CAUTION

When towing, make sure that the transmis-

sion, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.

Always attach safety chains before towing.

6-14

In case of emergency

For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT

TOWING” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside

Assistance Information Booklet (Canada).

SCE0925

Two-wheel drive models

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow automatic transmission models

with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the rear wheels.

In case of emergency

6-15

When towing rear wheel drive models with

the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition in the LOCK position.

This may damage the steering lock mechanism.

6-16

In case of emergency

Four-wheel drive models

Four-wheel Drive (4WD) models

INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

SCE0907

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.

Front

Rear

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

WARNING

Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

Do not spin your tires at high speed. This

could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

SCE0921

Pulling a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

Attach the tow strap to the recovery hook.

CAUTION

Tow chains or cables must be attached only

to the main structural members of the vehicle or the towing hooks. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.

SCE0922

In case of emergency

6-17

Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle

stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the towing hook.

The towing hook is under tremendous force

when used to free a stuck vehicle. Never pull the hook at an angle.

Always pull the cable straight out from the

front or rear of the vehicle.

Pulling devices should be routed so they do

not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems.

Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D.

● Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

6-18

In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Washing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Underbody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Tire dressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain

● after driving on coastal roads

● when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

Do not use car washes that use acid in the

detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning.

The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

Do not wash the vehicle with strong house-

hold soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or

while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths,

such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

7-2

Appearance and care

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before reapplying wax.

An INFINITI retailer can assist you in choosing the proper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at an INFINITI retailer or any automotive accessory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● INFINITI recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.

Appearance and care

7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR

Aluminum alloy wheels

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:

Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or

alkali contents to clean the wheels.

Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels

when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.

Rinse the wheel to completely remove the

cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non- abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSING

INFINITI does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensors. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

7-4

Appearance and care

CAUTION

Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar

material.

Small dirt particles can be abrasive and dam-

aging to the leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s natural finish.

Only use fabric protectors approved by

INFINITI.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter

or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:

● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury:

NEVER place a floor mat on top of another

floor mat in the driver front position.

Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifi-

cally designed for use in your vehicle model.

See your INFINITI retailer for more information.

Properly position the mats in the floorwell

using the floor mat positioning aid. See

“Floor mat positioning aid” later in this section.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

SAI0038

Front (example)

Floor mat positioning aid

This model includes front floor mat brackets to act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The floor mats have grommet holes in them. To install, simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

Appearance and care

7-5

CORROSION PROTECTION

Bracket positions

SAI0052

The illustration shows the location of the floor mat brackets.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE

THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing where atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt is used.

7-6

Appearance and care

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from

the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

Never allow water or other liquids to come in

contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult an INFINITI retailer.

Appearance and care

7-7

MEMO

7-8

Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Engine compartment check locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Vk56vd engine model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Changing engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Drive belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Rear window wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Brake pad wear warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Brake booster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Intelligent Key battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your new INFINITI has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with long service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your IN-

FINITI’s fine mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “INFINITI Service and

Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your INFINITI at regular intervals.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-today operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, an INFINITI retailer.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced by an INFINITI retailer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-retailership information systems.

They are completely qualified to work on

INFINITI vehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITI retailer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have an

INFINITI retailer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify an INFINITI retailer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE

ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood, operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

8-2

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) trans-

mitter components: Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the

INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see an

INFINITI retailer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjusted, see an INFINITI retailer.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjuster and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-3

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe condition require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by an INFINITI retailer. (See

“PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING” in the “5. Starting and driving” section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off.

Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see

“CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care” section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the

parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the selector lever to P (Park).

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.

Never connect or disconnect the battery or

any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Never leave the engine or automatic trans-

mission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

If you must work with the engine running,

keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.

It is advisable to secure or remove any loose

clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.

Always wear eye protection whenever you

work on your vehicle.

If you must run the engine in an enclosed

space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

Never get under the vehicle while it is sup-

ported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks

away from fuel tank and the battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic

engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

On gasoline engine models, the fuel filter or

fuel lines should be serviced by an INFINITI retailer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

CAUTION

Do not work under the hood while the engine

is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also available.

(See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.)

You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage.

If in doubt about any servicing, we recommend that it be done by an

INFINITI retailer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-5

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

VK56VD ENGINE MODEL

1. Window washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse/fusible link holder

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Power steering fluid reservoir

8-6

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse/fusible link holder

8. Battery

9. Radiator filler cap

SDI2585

10. Engine coolant reservoir

11. Drive belts

12. Air cleaner

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and

50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator or coolant reser-

voir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6.

In case of emergency” section of this manual.

The radiator is equipped with a pressure

type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to

use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to

34°F (37°C). If additional freeze

protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to

34°F (37°C). The use of

other types of coolant solutions other than

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant

is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of nondistilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the Nissan

Service and Maintenance Guide for more details.

Outside temperature down to

°F

⫺30

°C

⫺35

Antifreeze

50%

Demineralized water or distilled water

50%

NOTE:

The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of nondistilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide for more details.

The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage the engine cooling system.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-7

SDI2511

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level

in the reservoir when the

engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN

, open the reservoir tank cap and add coolant up to the MAX

䊊 level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level

.

Tighten the cap securely after adding engine coolant.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide for more details.

If the cooling system requires coolant frequently, have it checked by an INFINITI retailer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be performed by an INFINITI retailer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate INFINITI

Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never

change the coolant when the engine is hot.

Never remove the radiator cap or coolant res-

ervoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.

Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant.

If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep coolant out of reach of children and

pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

8-8

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE OIL

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

5. Remove the engine undercover.

● Remove the bolts that hold the undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

SDI2531

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine.

Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be within the range

If the oil level is below

, remove the oil

.

filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening.

Do not overfill

.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.

● Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points.

● A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-9

SDI2528

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug

䊊 with a wrench and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.

Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

8-10

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

4. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the engine oil filter change is needed.)

Loosen the oil filter

䊊 with an oil filter wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine.

Failure to do so could lead to engine damage.

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N·m)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the oil filler cap securely.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole while filling the engine with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(15 to 21 N·m)

See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/ LU-

BRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for drain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter.

Correct as required.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into position as the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip out.

b. Hold the engine undercover into position.

c. Insert the clip through the undercover into the hole in the frame, then push the center of the clip in to lock the clip in place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold the undercover in place. Be careful not to strip the bolts or over-tighten them.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

WARNING

Prolonged and repeated contact with used

engine oil may cause skin cancer.

Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil.

If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

Contact an INFINITI retailer if replacement is required.

CAUTION

Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do

not mix with other fluids.

Using automatic transmission fluid other

than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-11

POWER STEERING FLUID

SDI1765A

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range (

: HOT MAX.,

: HOT MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range (

: COLD MAX.,

COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86°F

:

(0 to 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

Do not overfill.

Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

BRAKE FLUID

For further brake fluid specification information, see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/

LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed container.

Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

Be sure to clean the filler cap before

removing.

Brake fluid is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

8-12

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CAUTION

Do not add brake fluid with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position or the engine running. Doing so could make the brake fluid overfill when the ignition switch is turned off.

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces.

This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash the surface with water.

SDI2513

BRAKE FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line

䊊 or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line

.

To add brake fluid:

1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Depress and release the foot brake pedal more than 40 times.

3. Open the reservoir filler cap and add brake fluid up to the MAX line

. (See

“CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/

LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for the recommended types of brake fluid.)

NOTE:

When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position after adding brake fluid up to the MAX line

in the reservoir, the brake fluid decreases below the MAX line

. This is normal.

If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-13

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

WARNING

SDI2517

Antifreeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warning illuminates.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant

for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.

Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank

with washer fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with wa-

ter to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

8-14

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

BATTERY

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (

⫺) battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

WARNING

Do not expose the battery to flames or elec-

trical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes.

Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the

battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

When working on or near a battery, always

wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.

Battery posts, terminals and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash hands after handling.

Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

DI0137MA

Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove the battery cover if it is necessary). It should be between the UPPER LEVEL

䊊 lines.

䊊 and LOWER LEVEL

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening.

Do not overfill.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-15

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

SDI1480C

1. Remove the cell plugs

.

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL

䊊 line.

If the side of the battery is not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell; the condition

OK and the conditions

䊊 added.

䊊 indicates needs more to be

3. Tighten cell plugs

.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP START-

ING” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact an

INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

Do not ground accessories directly to the

battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.

Use electrical accessories with the engine

running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

8-16

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

DRIVE BELTS

SDI2533

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Water pump

3. Alternator

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belts. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

SPARK PLUGS

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness.

If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by an INFINITI retailer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule in your “INFINITI

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and the ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-17

AIR CLEANER

SDI2020

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see an INFINITI retailer for servicing.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule in

“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”, but do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

SDI2515

To remove the filter, release the lock pins and pull the unit upward

.

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide” for maintenance intervals.

When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

Operating the engine with the air cleaner

removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body or at-

tempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

8-18

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the release tab

, and then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm

䊊 while pushing the release tab to remove.

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until a click sounds.

4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove.

SDI2048

CAUTION

After wiper blade replacement, return the

wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-19

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADES BRAKES

SDI2516

Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle

.

This may cause improper windshield washer operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any objects with a needle or small pin

. Be careful not to damage the nozzle.

Contact an INFINITI retailer if checking or replacement is required.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by an INFINITI retailer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See an INFINITI retailer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear warning sound is heard.

8-20

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should be fol-

lowed. For additional information, see the maintenance log section of your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide” for maintenance intervals.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, depress and release the foot brake pedal more than 20 times.

When the foot brake pedal movement

(distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the foot brake pedal, start the engine.

3. With the foot brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds.

4. Run the engine for 1 minute without depressing the foot brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the foot brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the hydraulic pressure decreases.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by an INFINITI retailer.

FUSES

SDI2518

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI2532

8-21

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover.

This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the headlight switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the engine hood and remove the cover on the battery.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover

, or

.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

SDI1754

5. If the fuse is open new fuse

, replace it with a

. Spare fuses are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by an

INFINITI retailer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine INFINITI parts.

8-22

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover.

This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the headlight switch is turned to OFF.

SDI2519

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

.

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by an

INFINITI retailer. Spare fuses are stored in the fuse box.

SDI2704

Extended storage switch (if so equipped)

To reduce battery drain, the extended storage switch comes from the factory switched off.

Prior to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is pushed in (switched on) and should always remain on.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-23

NOTE:

If the extended storage switch malfunctions or if the fuse is open, it is not necessary to replace the switch. In this case, remove the extended storage switch and replace it with a new fuse of the same rating.

How to remove the extended storage switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs

䊊 side of the storage switch.

found on each

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the fuse box

.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as it could cause a malfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the case.

SDI2451

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Release the lock knob at the back of the

Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key.

8-24

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI2452

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts

, and then push them together until it is securely closed

.

5. Push the buttons two or three times to check its operation.

See an INFINITI retailer if you need any assistance for replacement.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-25

LIGHTS

1. Map light

2. Park light

3. Front side marker light

4. Front turn signal light

5. Fog light

8-26

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

6. Headlight (high-beam, low-beam)

7. Puddle light

8. Step light

9. Side turn signal light

10. Cargo light

SDI2606

11. High-mounted stop light

12. Front armrest light

13. Rear armrest light

14. Rear personal light

15. Rear combination light

(tail/stop/turn signal/side marker light)

16. Tail light

17. Back-up light

18. License plate light

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact an INFINITI retailer.

Xenon headlight bulb :

If replacement is required, see an INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at an INFINITI retailer. For additional information, see “HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item

Headlight*

High/Low beams (Xenon)

Front turn signal light*

Fog light*

Park light*

Front side marker light*

Rear combination light* tail back-up stop/tail side marker turn signal

License plate light

Puddle light*

Front and rear armrest light*

Map light

Rear personal light

Cargo light

Vanity mirror light

Step light*

High-mounted stop light*

Wattage (W)

35

21

35

5

5

5

16

LED

LED

21

5

LED

LED

8

8

8

2

8

LED

Bulb No.

D2S

WY21W

H8

W5W

W5W

W5W

W16W

WY21W

W5W

*: See an INFINITI retailer for replacement.

NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at an INFINITI retailer for the latest information about parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-27

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

8-28

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Map light

SDI2030

SDI1679

Rear personal light

SDI2031

Cargo light

Vanity mirror light

WHEELS AND TIRES

SDI1729

SDI2032

If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if so equipped) appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal display, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:

Most tires naturally lose air over time.

Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-29

TPMS also provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. (See “TPMS with Tire Inflation

Indicator” in the “5. Starting and driving” section about the TPMS with Tire

Inflation Indicator.)

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.

The Gross Vehicle Weight rating

(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

8-30

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Tire and Loading Information label

Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

SDI2496

Vehicle load limit: See “VEHICLE

LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.

Technical and consumer information” section.

Original size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

Tire size — see “TIRE LABELING” later in this section.

Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so equipped)

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-31

SDI1949

Checking the tire pressure

1.

Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2.

Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3.

Remove the gauge.

4.

Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare it to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5.

Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

6.

Install the valve stem cap.

7.

Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

8-32

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

FRONT

ORIGINAL

TIRE

REAR

ORIGINAL

TIRE

SPARE

TIRE

SIZE

P275/

50R22 111H

P275/

60R20

114H

P275/

50R22 111H

P275/

60R20

114H

P275/

50R22 111H

P275/

60R20

114H

COLD TIRE

INFLATION

PRESSURE

240 kPa,

35 PSI

240 kPa,

35 PSI

240 kPa,

35 PSI

240 kPa,

35 PSI

240 kPa,

35 PSI

240 kPa,

35 PSI

Example

SDI1575

Example

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number

(TIN) for safety standard certification.

The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)

1.

P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires have this information.)

2.

Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3.

Two-digit number (60): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of height to width.

SDI1606

4.

R: The “R” stands for radial.

5.

Two-digit number (16): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6.

Two- or three-digit number (94): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.

7.

H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-33

SDI1607

Example

1.

TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department of Transportation”. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.

2.

Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identification mark

3.

Two-digit code: Tire size

4.

Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)

5.

Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

8-34

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

6.

Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire.

Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire has radial structure.

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

When changing or replacing tires, be sure all

four tires are of the same type (Example:

Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. An INFINITI retailer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

Replacement tires may have a lower speed

rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All

Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than

All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

INFINITI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of nonstudded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions.

Use only

SAE Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-35

recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.

Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with tire chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

SDI1662

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

INFINITI recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See

“FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency” section for tire replacing procedures.)

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to the specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to the specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

8-36

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI1663

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.

Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician, because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact an INFINITI retailer.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. (See “SPECIFICATIONS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.)

WARNING

The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-37

If the wheels are changed for any reason,

always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. See “WHEELS AND

TIRES” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel

or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

The use of retread tire is not recommended.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Four-wheel Drive (4WD) models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.

Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears.

ONLY use spare tires specified for the 4WD

model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. Contact an INFINITI retailer.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the

INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

See “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care” section for details about care of the wheels.

Spare tire

When a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY USE

ONLY or conventional), the TPMS will not function.

8-38

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . 9-2

Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . 9-10

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Securing the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Maximum gross vehicle weight (GVW)/ maximum gross axle weight (GAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Traction AA, A, B and C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Temperature A, B and C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test . . . . 9-31

Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Recommended specifications Capacity (Approximate)

US measure Imp measure

26 gal 21-5/8 gal

Liter

98.4

See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.

Fuel

Engine oil*1

Drain and refill

With oil filter change

Without oil filter change

Cooling system

With reservoir

6-7/8 qt

6-1/2 qt

15-3/4 qt

5-3/4 qt

5-1/2 qt

13-1/8 qt

6.5

6.2

14.9

•Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2, *3

•Viscosity SAE 5W-30

Automatic transmission fluid

Transfer fluid

Front differential gear oil

Rear differential gear oil

Power steering fluid (PSF)

50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*4

Genuine NISSAN Transfer Fluid for ATX90A transfer*5*6

Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity SAE

80W-90*7

Genuine NISSAN differential oil synthetic 75W-90 or API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity

SAE 75W-90*8

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*9

Brake fluid

Suspension fluid

Multi-purpose grease

Air conditioning system refrigerant

Air conditioning system lubricants

Window washer fluid

Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*10 or equivalent DOT 3

Genuine NISSAN Hydraulic Suspension Fluid*11*12

NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

HFC-134a (R-134a)*13

NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent

Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.

*2: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.

*3:

INFINITI recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at INFINITI retailers.

*4:

Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

*5:

Using transfer fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Transfer Fluid will damage the transfer, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

*6: See your INFINITI retailer for recommended transfer fluid.

*7: For hot climates, Viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 32°F (0°C).

9-2

Technical and consumer information

*8: See an INFINITI retailer for service for synthetic oil.

*9: DEXRON

TM

VI type ATF may also be used.

*10: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI retailer.

*11: Using Hydraulic Suspension fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Hydraulic Suspension fluid will damage the Hydraulic Suspension, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

*12: See your INFINITI retailer for recommended hydraulic suspension fluid.

*13: For additional information, see “VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.

Technical and consumer information

9-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

VK56VD engine

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least

91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified could

adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded

gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel.

Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the

INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter

(WWFC) specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.

INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence.

INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITI cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.

The fuel should be unleaded and have an oc-

tane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol

blend, is used, it should contain no more than

10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.)

If a methanol blend is used, it should contain

no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in

INFINITI vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling or hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling.

Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

9-4

Technical and consumer information

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have an INFINITI retailer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITI is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at an

INFINITI retailer or other competent service facility.

However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

CAUTION

Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85

fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

U.S. government regulations require ethanol

dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Technical and consumer information

9-5

1. API certification mark

2. API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance, see “CA-

PACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/ LUBRI-

CANTS” earlier in this section.

INFINITI recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

9-6

Technical and consumer information

STI0505

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change.

Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in change intervals.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new INFINITI vehicle limited warranties.

Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes.

● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures,

● driving in dusty conditions,

● extensive idling,

● towing a trailer,

● stop and go “rush hour” traffic,

Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in your INFINITI vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-

134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, NISSAN A/C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your INFINITI retailer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant.

Contact an INFINITI retailer when servicing your air conditioning system.

Technical and consumer information

9-7

SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model

Type

VK56VD

Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement

Bore × Stroke

Displacement

Firing order in (mm) cu in (cm

3

)

8-cylinder, V-slanted at 90°

3.858 × 3.622 (98 × 92)

338.78 (5,552)

1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2

See the emission control information label on the underside of the hood.

Idle speed

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)

Spark plug rpm degree/rpm

Standard DILKAR7B11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

9-8

Technical and consumer information

STI0397B

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type

Conventional and spare

Tire

Type

Conventional and spare

DIMENSIONS

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Front tread

Rear tread

Wheelbase

Size

20 × 8J

22 × 8J

Size

P275/60R20 114H

P275/50R22 111H in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)

Offset in (mm)

1.18 (30)

Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]

35 (240)

208.3 (5,290)

79.9 (2,030)

75.8 (1,925)

67.5 (1,715)

67.9 (1,725)

121.1 (3,075)

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR

VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

If you plan to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline.

Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or dis-

trict, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user.

INFINITI is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

Technical and consumer information

9-9

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0431

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

STI0708

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

STI0709

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

9-10

Technical and consumer information

STI0448

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross

Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

STI0738

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

LABEL

The emission control information label is attached as shown.

STI0494

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as illustrated.

Technical and consumer information

9-11

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

STI0739

The air conditioner specification label is attached as shown.

To install the front license plate bracket to your vehicle, contact an INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside the vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight

does not

include passengers and cargo.

9-12

Technical and consumer information

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the weight of total occupants weight subtracted from the load limit.

Technical and consumer information

9-13

9-14

Technical and consumer information

STI0445

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the illustration.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1.

Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2.

Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3.

Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

4.

5.

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs. (1400

⫺ 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or (640

⫺ 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

6.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

(See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS” later in this section.)

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label.

SIC4446

SECURING THE LOAD

There are tie down hooks located in the cargo area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

Do not apply a total load of more than 22 lb (10 kg) to a single hook hook

or 7 lb (3 kg) to a single when securing cargo.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Technical and consumer information

9-15

The child restraint top tether strap may be

damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR or the maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

LOADING TIPS

The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can cause unsafe vehicle handling and long braking distance. This may cause a premature tire failure, which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

9-16

Technical and consumer information

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for

the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow

a trailer, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and other systems.

An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.InfinitiUSA.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the “TOWING LOAD/ SPECIFI-

CATION” later in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs (1,587

kg) or more, trailers with a brake system

MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart.

STI0541

The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

Technical and consumer information

9-17

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The transmission high fluid temperature and engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of transmission and engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. See “IF

YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by INFINITI warranties.

STI0542

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 to 15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

9-18

Technical and consumer information

TI1012M

MAXIMUM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT

(GVW)/MAXIMUM GROSS AXLE

WEIGHT (GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front

GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

“Towing Load/Specification” chart found later in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and

Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front

Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.

Technical and consumer information

9-19

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 6,450 lb. (2,926 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -

7,300 lb. (3,311 kg).

● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from

“Towing Load/Specification” chart - 14,300 lb. (6,486 kg).

● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Towing Load/Specification” chart - 8,500 lb.

(3,856 kg).

7,300 lb. (3,311 kg)

⫺ 6,450 lb. (2,926 kg)

= 850 lb. (385 kg)

GVWR

GVW

Available for tongue weight

14,300 lb. (6,486 kg)

⫺ 6,450 lb. (2,926 kg)

= 7,850 lb. (3,560 kg)

850 lb. (385 kg) /

7,850 lb. (3,560 kg)

GCWR

GVW

Capacity available for towing

Available tongue weight

Available capacity

= 11 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings.

9-20

Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

MAXIMUM TOWING CAPACITY*1, *2

MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD

GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT RATING

US

Two-Wheel Drive

(2WD) model

Four-Wheel Drive

(4WD) model

8,500 (3,856)

850 (385)

14,300 (6,486) 14,480 (6,568)

Unit: lb (kg)

Canada

Four-Wheel Drive

(4WD) model

8,500 (3,856)

850 (385)

14,480 (6,568)

1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lb (2,267 kg).

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle is equipped with a trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine

INFINITI ball mounts and hitch balls are available from an INFINITI retailer.

Technical and consumer information

9-21

STI0804

To access the trailer hitch

, remove the trailer hitch cover located on the lower part of the rear bumper.

To remove the trailer hitch cover:

1. Remove the 2 clips.

9-22

Technical and consumer information

2. Pull the bottom of the cover straight backward to remove the inner side and upper clips.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16

⬙ smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer.

Many vehicles cannot carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg).

Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If you are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surge brake-equipped trailer, check with the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weightdistributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition switch in the ON position and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 -

13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,588 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,267 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb

(4,545 kg). A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb

(2,267 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb

(4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart earlier in this section.

Technical and consumer information

9-23

CAUTION

Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system,

brake system, etc.

Do not attach any additional hitches to your

vehicle because a hitch is already mounted to your vehicle frame.

Tire pressures

When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers’ specifications.

Safety chains

Always use a suitable chain between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

9-24

Technical and consumer information as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed.

Do not connect electrical devices that draw

more than 40 amps to the vehicle. The fusible link may melt.

STI0745

Trailer lights

Your vehicle is equipped with a towing package, which also includes the 7-pin trailer harness connector located under the trailer hitch cover on the rear bumper.

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical sys-

tem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact an INFINITI retailer or reputable trailer retailer.

Trailer brakes

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST

be used. However, most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking.

Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking systems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special brake sensing module).

Have a professional supplier of towing equipment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Some states or provinces have specific speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up.

Technical and consumer information

9-25

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector lever to the P

(Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6.

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models:

Make sure that the 4WD shift switch is engaged in the AUTO, 4HI or 4LO position and the Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning light is turned off.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● While going downhill, the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the need to brake as frequently.

● If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature, see “IF YOUR VEHICLE

OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.

9-26

Technical and consumer information

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (800 km).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule in the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle.

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.

● Use the Tow mode or downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● INFINITI recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer.

● While towing a trailer, do not use the following systems (if so equipped):

– the Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system

– the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system

– the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

– the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

– Intelligent Brake Assist ( IBA) system

● Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When launching a boat, do not allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, the transmission fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the INFINITI Service and

Maintenance Guide.

TOW mode

Using TOW mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Push the

TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The

TOW MODE indicator light in the meter illuminates when TOW mode is selected. Push the

TOW MODE switch again to turn TOW mode off.

TOW mode is automatically cancelled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

TOW mode includes the following features:

● Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grade.

● Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automatically downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the TOW mode with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the 9. “Technical and consumer information” section later in this manual.

Technical and consumer information

9-27

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these guidelines can result

in severe transmission damage.

Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always

tow forward, never backward.

DO NOT tow any automatic transmission ve-

hicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

DO NOT tow an Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) ve-

hicle with any of the wheels on the ground.

Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.

For emergency towing procedures refer to

“TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI” in the

“6. In case of emergency” section of this manual.

Automatic Transmission

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models :

Do not tow a 4WD vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground.

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models :

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly

MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels.

Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

9-28

Technical and consumer information

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and

C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Your INFINITI is covered by the following emission warranties.

For US:

● Emission Defects Warranty

● Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet that comes with your INFINITI. If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

● INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

Technical and consumer information

9-29

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty and

Roadside Assistance Information that comes with your INFINITI. If you did not receive a

Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information, or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,

SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify INFINITI by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying INFINITI.

If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that

INFINITI conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or INFINITI.

You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/

Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

9-30

Technical and consumer information

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from

Transport Canada’s Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify INFINITI of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800-361-4792.

A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with

4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns.

Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”.

Contact an INFINITI retailer to set “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

Technical and consumer information

9-31

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL

ORDER INFORMATION

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and INFINITI retailer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Genuine INFINITI Service Manual for this model and prior models can be purchased. A genuine

INFINITI Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle.

This manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at an INFINITI retailer. Genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manual can also be purchased.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuine

INFINITI Service Manuals contact:

1-800-450-9491 www.infiniti-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

INFINITI Service Manuals contact:

1-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI Service

Manual or Owner’s Manual for this model or prior models, please contact an INFINITI retailer.

For the phone number and location of an

INFINITI retailer in your area call the INFINITI

Satisfaction Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingual INFINITI representative will assist you.

9-32

Technical and consumer information

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of Genuine INFINITI

Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to INFINITI’s original exacting specifications — if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple.

Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use

Genuine INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI does not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nor does INFINI-

TI’s warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine INFINITI Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease.

INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.

Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.InfinitiUSA.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)

Technical and consumer information

9-33

MEMO

9-34

Technical and consumer information

10 Index

A

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) . . . . . . . 5-97

Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) . . . . 2-40

Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Aiming control

Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) . . 2-40

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Air bag system

Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Front-seat mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system . . . . . . 1-60

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system . . 1-60

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . 1-63, 2-16

Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Air conditioner

Advanced Climate Control System

(ACCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Air conditioner specification label . . . . 9-12

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations . . . . . 4-40, 9-7

Automatic climate control . . . . . 4-31, 4-34

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Alarm, How to stop alarm

(see vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Alcohol, drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . 5-97

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Interior appearance care . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Around View™ Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . 4-81

Auto closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Autolight system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Automatic

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . . 8-11

Climate control . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31, 4-34

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Driving with automatic transmission . . . 5-15

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Seat positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Average fuel consumption and speed . . . . 2-27

Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . 5-6

B

Back door (See lift gate) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Battery saver system . . . . . . . . 2-39, 2-66

Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Variable voltage control system . . . . . 8-16

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Belts (See drive belts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system . . . . . . 5-29

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Bluetooth

姞 Hands-Free Phone System . . . 4-96

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . 5-97

Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-13

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Brightness control

Display ON/OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

C

Cabin air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Cargo floor box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst . . . . 5-2

CD/CF/USB memory care and cleaning . . . 4-80

Center multi-function control panel . . . . . . 4-3

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47

LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . 1-30

Top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Chimes

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . 2-16

Circuit breaker, Fusible link . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-4

Climate control

Automatic climate control . . . . . . 4-31, 4-34

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Compact Disc (CD) player

(See audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Controller, Center multi-function control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Controls

Control panel button . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

INFINITI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Coolant

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . 8-8

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Fixed speed cruise control

(on ICC system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system . . 5-39

10-2

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

D

Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system . . . . 5-62

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Dot matrix liquid crystal display . . . . . . . 2-21

Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Driving with automatic transmission . . . 5-15

On-pavement and off-road driving . . . . . 5-6

Precautions when starting and driving . . 5-2

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Dual head restraint DVD system . . . . . . . 4-83

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Engine compartment check locations . . . 8-6

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Engine oil replacement indicator . . . . . 2-25

Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Engine start operation indicator . . . . . 2-23

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Entry/exit function, Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . 5-2

Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

E

Economy, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Elapsed time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Emission control information label . . . . . . 9-11

Emission control system warranty . . . . . . 9-29

Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Changing engine oil and filter . . . . . . . 8-9

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . 8-8

F

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . 9-11

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Changing engine oil and filter . . . . . . . 8-9

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . 2-43

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Floor mat cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . . 8-11

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-13

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system . . . 5-75

Front passenger air bag and status light . . . 1-57

Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Front seat

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 1-16

Front-seat active head restraint . . . . . . . . 1-12

Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Fuel economy information (display) . . . . 4-9

Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink

姞 Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . 2-7

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

H

Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth

姞 . . . 4-96

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . 2-43

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Headlights

Aiming control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Aiming control (See adaptive front lighting system (AFS)) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Heater

Automatic climate control . . . . . . 4-31, 4-34

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

HomeLink

姞 Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . 2-68

Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Hook

Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

I

Ignition switch (Push-button) . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Indicator

Dot matrix display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . 2-31

INFINITI voice recognition system . . . . . . 4-106

INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . 9-31

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system . . . . . 5-80

Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system . . . . 5-39

Main switch indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

10-3

Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Intelligent Key warning light . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Interior light control switch . . . . . . . . . . 2-67

Interior light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 iPod

姞 player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

ISOFIX child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

K

Keyless entry

(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . 3-15

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . 3-6

L

Labels

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

Air conditioner specification label . . . . 9-12

Emission control information label . . . . 9-11

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Tire and Loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31, 9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . 9-10

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

10-4

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system . . . 5-24

Lane departure warning (LDW) system . . . . 5-20

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Prevention (LDP) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Lane departure warning light . . . . . . . . . 2-14

LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

License plate, Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Headlights bulb replacement . . . . . . . 8-27

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior light control switch . . . . . . . . 2-67

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Vanity mirror lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Loading information

(See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . 9-12

Lock

Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Lift gate lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Locking with mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Low outside temperature warning . . . . . . 2-24

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . 2-14

Low tire pressure warning system (See tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) . . . . . . 5-3

Luggage hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

M

Maintenance

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Indicators for maintenance . . . . . . . . 2-25

Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Malfunction indicator light (MIL) . . . . . . . 2-19

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) . . . . 3-3

Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Meter

Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . 2-41

Mirror

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

N

New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

O

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Changing engine oil and filter . . . . . . . 8-9

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Oil filter replacement indicator . . . . . . 2-25

Operation, Indicators for operation . . . . . . 2-23

Outside air temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . 6-13

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

P

Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Parking

Brake break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

Phone

Bluetooth

姞 Hands-Free Phone System . . 4-96

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

Power

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61

Precautions

Audio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Braking precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Lane departure warning (LDW) system . . 5-20

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

On-pavement and off-road driving . . . . . 5-6

Seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . 1-50

When starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Preview function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

Preview Function warning light . . . . . . . . 2-16

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

R

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Rain-sensing auto wiper system . . . . . . . 2-33

Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock . . 3-6

Rear personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . 2-34

Rear window wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Recorders, Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Remote controller (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Roadside assistance program . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Roof

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

S

Safety

Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Satellite radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Seat adjustment

Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . 1-2

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 1-16

Seat belt(s)

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . 1-18

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

10-5

Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . 2-16

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Seat belts with pretensioners . . . . . . . 1-62

Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Three-point type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Seat(s)

Climate controlled seats . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Driver-side memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Security system, Vehicle security system . . 2-29

Security system (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

System), Engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Selector lever, Shift lock release . . . . . . . 5-18

Servicing climate control . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Shift lock release

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Shifting, Automatic transmission . . . . . . . 5-15

SNOW mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

Snow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 9-9

Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Precautions when starting and driving . . 5-2

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Status light, Front passenger air bag . . . . . 1-57

Steering

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

10-6

Steering lock release malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . 1-63

Supplemental air bag warning light . . 1-63, 2-16

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . 1-50

Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50

Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . 2-43

Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Snow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

T

2nd row seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

3rd row seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System),

Engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Tire

Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Tire replacement indicator . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Tires

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system . . . . . 5-3

Tire and Loading information label . 8-31, 9-11

Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Tire dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Tire pressure information (display) . . . . 4-9

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2

Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . 9-28

Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Top

Tether strap child restraints . . . . . . . . 1-34

Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Tow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Towing

Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . 5-3

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator . . . . . 5-5

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system . . . . . 6-2

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Transceiver, HomeLink

姞 Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . . 8-11

Driving with automatic transmission . . . 5-15

Transmission selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Transmitter

(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . 3-15

Traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

U

Underbody cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

USB memory operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Vanity mirror lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . 8-16

Vehicle

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . 9-10

Loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . 6-17

Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . 5-98

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Vehicle information and settings

(display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Voice command (INFINITI voice recognition system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112, 4-122

Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

Voice recognition, Alternate command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

W

Warning

Check tire pressure warning . . . . . . . 2-24

Dot matrix display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . 2-43

Lane departure warning (LDW) system . . 5-20

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels . . . 1-63

Warning light

4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . 1-63, 2-16

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Intelligent Key warning light . . . . . . . . 2-14

Lane departure warning light . . . . . . . 2-14

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . 2-14

Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . 2-16

Warranty, Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . 2-32

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Care of wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . 7-4

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Window(s)

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . 2-32

Wiper

Rain-sensing auto wiper system . . . . . 2-33

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . 2-32

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

X

Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

10-7

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

VK56VD engine

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least

91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified could

adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded

gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst.

Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel.

Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the

INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional information, see “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES

RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s

Manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle.

888744 EN QX56 OM.indd 1

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2011 Infiniti QX Owner’s Manual

2/10/11 11:20 AM

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents